FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 802.11g Wireless LAN PCI-E Mini Card

434155-001.fm Page 1 Monday, June 26, 2006 11:25 AM HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started Thank you for purchasing an HP Broadband Wireless computer with Built-in 3G broadband from Vodafone. Your new computer, when used with Built-in 3G broadband service, gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road, across town, or just about anywhere.*

Before you can use Built-in 3G broadband from Vodafone (service purchased separately), you must activate service and install the preloaded software. You will be prompted to run the HP Broadband Wireless setup utility when you start the computer. To activate your Vodafone service and install the preloaded software, follow the instructions in the setup utility. To learn more about the benefits of your HP Broadband Wireless computer and Built-in 3G broadband, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/broadbandwireless.

*Subject to coverage availability. Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. VODAFONE and the Vodafone logos and Vodafone Mobile Connect are trade marks of the Vodafone Group. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trade marks of their respective owners. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: September 2006 PRINTER: Replace this box with Printed- In (PI) Statement(s) as per spec. NOTE: This box is simply a placeholder. PI Statement(s) do not have to fit inside the box but should be placed in this area. 434155-001

435748-001.book Page i Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC Document Part Number: 435748-001 March 2007 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, and begin using the computer in Windows. 435748-001.book Page ii Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435748-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. 435748-001.book Page iii Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware . 11 Setting up the computer . 13 Step 1: Insert the battery . 14 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power. 15 Step 3: Turn on the computer . 16 Step 4: Set up the software . 18 Step 5: Create recovery discs (recommended) . 18 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware . 21 Top components . 22 Front components . 23 Left-side components . 24 Right-side components . 25 Rear components . 26 Bottom components. 27 Wireless antennae (select models only). 28 Getting Started iii 435748-001.book Page iv Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents 3 Next steps Protecting the computer . 31 Protecting the computer from viruses . 31 Protecting your system files . 32 Protecting your privacy . 32 Protecting the computer from power surges . 32 Using the computer safely . 33 Connecting to a computer network . 35 Installing additional hardware and software . 36 Identifying and installing hardware. 36 Locating and installing software . 36 Updating the software installed on the computer. 37 Finding the user guides . 38 Turning off the computer correctly . 38 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 41 Quick troubleshooting . 42 The computer is unable to start up. 42 The computer screen is blank . 43 Software is functioning abnormally . 44 The computer is turned on but not responding . 44 The computer is unusually warm. 45 An external device is not working. 46 The WLAN connection is not working . 46 Help and Support . 47 Contacting technical support . 48 A Connect to the Internet from your home Choosing an ISP. A1 Using the New Connection Wizard . A2 Choosing the type of Internet connection . A2 iv Getting Started 435748-001.book Page v Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs . B1 Backing up your information . B2 When to back up . B2 Back up suggestions . B3 Backing up specific files or folders . B4 Backing up the entire hard drive . B4 Creating recovery points . B5 Scheduling backups . B6 Performing a recovery . B7 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs. B7 Performing a recovery from the hard drive . B7 C Specifications Operating environment. C1 Rated input power . C2 Index Getting Started v 435748-001.book Page vi Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. Getting Started 11 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Component 1 Power cord Component 4 Country-specific modem adapter

(select models only) 2 AC adapter 5 Modem cable (select models only)

(optional for setup) 3 Primary battery Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. Unless you use dial-up networking, the modem cable is optional for setup. 12 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Setting up the computer Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. Inserting the battery into the computer 2. Connecting the computer to external power The battery begins to charge. 3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for instructions. CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Getting Started 13 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery To insert a primary battery:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 2. Slide the battery 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. The battery release latches 2 automatically lock the battery into place. 14 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 2: Connect the computer to external power Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector 1 on the computer. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2. 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet 3. Getting Started 15 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. Step 3: Turn on the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch 1 to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display 2. 16 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup To turn on the computer:

Press the power button 1. The power light on the power button 2 turns on. Getting Started 17 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 4: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. CAUTION: If you are prompted to select an operating system language before the Welcome to Windows page is displayed, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. For more information about connecting to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home, in this guide. Step 5: Create recovery discs

(recommended) You can create a set of recovery discs of your full factory image using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for detailed instructions. 18 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Getting Started 21 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Top components Component 1 Power button Component 9 Internal microphone

(select models only) 2 Power lights (2)

- TouchPad scroll zone 3 Info button

(select models only) q Fingerprint reader

(select models only) 4 Wireless button w Right TouchPad button 5 Wireless lights (2) e Left TouchPad button 6 Presentation button

(select models only) r Drive light 7 Volume mute button t Battery light 8 Volume scroll zone

(select models only) y TouchPad 22 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Front components Quick tour Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light Component 4 Drive light 5 Speakers (2) 6 Display release latch Getting Started 23 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Left-side components Component Component 1 Power connector 5 Audio-in (microphone) jack 2 Vent 6 1394 port (select models only) 3 USB ports (2) 7 PC Card slot 4 Audio-out (headphone) jack 24 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Right-side components Quick tour Component 1 Media Card Reader

(select models only) 2 USB ports (2)

(select models only) Component 3 Optical drive 4 RJ-11 (modem) jack Getting Started 25 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Rear components Component Component 1 Security cable slot 3 External monitor port 2 RJ-45 (network) jack 4 S-Video-out jack

(select models only) 26 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Bottom components Quick tour Component 1 Bluetooth compartment

(select models only) 2 Vents (3) Component 6 Battery release latches (2) 7 Docking connector

(select models only) 3 Accessory battery connector 8 Memory module compartment 4 SIM slot (select models only) 9 WLAN module compartment

(select models only) 5 Battery bay

- Hard drive bay Getting Started 27 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Component 1 WLAN antennae (2)

(select models only)*

2 WWAN antenna

(select models only)*

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. 28 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 3 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how your computer can be protected from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, unsafe operation, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. For information about using and updating Norton Internet Security and for purchasing extended update service, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. To access Norton Internet Security, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Getting Started 31 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Protecting your system files The HP Backup and Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for additional information. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. To optimize the computers privacy protection features, observe these practices:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from most computer or electronic retailers in some regions. 32 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Using the computer safely Next steps WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and in Help and Support. To access the guide in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Getting Started 33 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or place the computer on your lap for extended periods. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin for extended periods during operation. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer and the AC adapter to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in Help and Support. To access the notices in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support >

User Guides. 34 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Connecting to a computer network The computer may have the following networking capabilities:

Local area network (LAN) Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) Bluetooth If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. If the computer has a Bluetooth device, you can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to Bluetooth online Help. For information on connecting the computer to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home. Getting Started 35 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Identifying and installing hardware To see a list of hardware installed on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer. 2. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, click View system information. 3. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also modify your device configurations using Device Manager. To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software The computer includes software that is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled on your hard drive. To see a list of the ready-to-use software preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Click Start > All Programs. 2. Click the program you want to open. 36 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Provided on a CD or DVD. To install a software program from a disc, follow these steps:

1. Insert the disc into your optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. Preloaded software. This is software provided on the hard drive but not ready to use. To locate or install preloaded software or drivers, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions and select the check box next to the software program or driver you want to install. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the manufacturers Web site. Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer, select Start > Help and Support. Getting Started 37 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Finding the user guides User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other information resources about using the computer are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides:

Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Turning off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If you have been registered to a network domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer. If you are unable to turn off the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 38 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. Access additional information about the computer and Web site links through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. Contact technical support for further assistance. Getting Started 41 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating, and then plug the adapter into an AC outlet. Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 42 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM The computer screen is blank Troubleshooting If the computer is on but the screen is blank: the computer may be in Standby or in Hibernation; the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen; or the display switch may not be functioning properly. Try the following suggestions to resolve the issue:

To exit Standby or Hibernation, briefly press the power button. Standby and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Standby and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel

> Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneous display on all devices. Press the display switch on the computer to be sure that it moves freely. The display switch is normally located on the upper-left corner of the keyboard. Getting Started 43 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Software is functioning abnormally Follow these suggestions if the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally:

Restart the computer:

In Windows XP Home, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. In Windows XP Professional, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart > OK. (If you have been registered to a domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer.) If you cannot restart the computer using these procedures, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 3, Next steps. The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on, but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If you have been registered to a network domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer. 44 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting If you are unable to shut down the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Getting Started 45 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with your operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. The WLAN connection is not working If a WLAN connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Be sure that the wireless light on the computer is on. If the light is off, press the wireless button to turn it on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected, and the lights are on. 46 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting If applicable, be sure that the wireless router (access point) is turned on and properly connected to the DSL or cable modem. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For information on setting up a home wireless network connection, visit http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless

(English only). For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. Help and Support If the preceding questions and solutions did not address your problem, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Help and Support provides the following assistance:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications Answers to questions about using the computer Product information to help you learn to use the computer and operating system features Updates for the operating system, device drivers, and software provided on the computer Checkups for computer functionality Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures Links to community forums of IT experts Getting Started 47 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to get online help or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > My HP Computer. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support >

My HP Computer. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). 48 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM A Connect to the Internet from your home The computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must choose an Internet service provider (ISP) and choose the type of Internet connection you want, such as broadband (wired or wireless) or dial-up. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choosing an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes the New Connection Wizard to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started A1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Connect to the Internet from your home Using the New Connection Wizard The New Connection Wizard works under the following conditions:

You already have an account with an ISP. You have a disc from an ISP. You do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. You have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard, select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling the Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. Choosing the type of Internet connection There are 3 basic types of Internet connection:

Broadband serviceHigh-speed Internet access is provided by an ISP through one of the following services:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services Broadband service may require additional hardware and/or software provided by the ISP. A2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Connect to the Internet from your home WLANInternet connection through a WLAN requires broadband wired service with an ISP as well as a wireless router (purchased separately). To learn about setting up wireless access, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). WWANThis broadband wireless connection allows your computer to stay connected to the Internet over large geographic areas while the computer is in motion, such as in a car or train. WWAN capability requires an integrated HP Broadband Wireless Module (select models only) and service from a mobile network operator. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer or see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/broadbandwireless

(English only). Dial-upYou can access the Internet by dialing in to a service provider using a modem cable connected to the RJ-11

(modem) jack. Getting Started A3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media (purchased separately). Formatted DVDRW discs and DVDRW double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. Getting Started B1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To create a set of recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information You can only recover files that you have previously back up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup and Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup and Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backup up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software B2 Getting Started AppB.fm Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:57 AM Backup and recovery Back up suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup and Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the My Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

1. Display the screen. 2. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit >

Paste. Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. Drivers, utilities, and applications installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. Getting Started B3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Backing up specific files or folders You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Back up individual files and folders and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. B4 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To back up your entire hard drive:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. Getting Started B5 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly, or monthly) or at specific events, such as system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup Scheduler. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. B6 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup and Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup and Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup and Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup and Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Getting Started B7 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Recover important files or the entire system, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. 3. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. B8 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM C Specifications Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started C1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. C2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index Bluetooth 35 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 27 buttons info 22 power 17, 22 presentation 22 TouchPad 22 volume mute 22 wireless 22 C cables and cords, power 42 compartments Bluetooth 27 memory module 27 WLAN 27 computer turn off 38 turn on 16 computer viruses 44 connecting the computer to external power 15 connecting to a computer network 35 1394 port, identifying 24 A AC adapter identifying 12 using 15 accessory battery connector, identifying 27 altitude specifications C1 antivirus software 44 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 24 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 24 B battery charging 16 indentifying 12 inserting 14 battery bay, identifying 27 battery light behavior 16 identifying 22, 23 battery release latch, identifying 27 bays battery 27 hard drive 27 Getting Started Index1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index connectors accessory battery 27 docking 27 power 24 country-specific modem adapter 12 D devices, external, troubleshooting 46 display release latch, identifying 23 display, switching image 43 docking connector, identifying 27 drive light, identifying 22, 23 E environmental specifications C1 external devices, troubleshooting 46 external monitor port, identifying 26 F fingerprint reader, identifying 22 firewalls 32 H hard drive bay, identifying 27 Help and Support 47 Hibernation 43 humidity specifications C1 I IEC 60950 compliance 34 image, switching among display devices 43 info button, identifying 22 inserting the battery 14 internal microphone, identifying 22 Internet access A2 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 24 audio-out (headphone) 24 RJ-11 (modem) 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S-Video-out 26 L labels, service tag 48 LAN (local area network) 35 latches battery release 27 display release 23 lights battery 16, 22, 23 drive 22, 23 power 17, 22, 23 wireless 22, 23 locating user guides 38 M Media Card Reader, identifying 25 memory module compartment, identifying 27 Index2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index power cord connecting 15 identifying 12 power light 17, 42 power lights, identifying 22, 23 power surge 32 presentation button, identifying 22 printer 46 Product Id 48 R rated input power specifications C2 registration number, operating system 48 regulatory information notices 34 Regulatory, Safety and Envi-

ronmental Notices 34 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S Safety and Comfort Guide 33 scroll zone, TouchPad 22 serial number, computer 48 service tag 48 seurity cable slot, identifying 26 SIM slot, identifying 27 slot, SIM 27 modem setting up Internet service A2 surge protection 32 modem cable 12 monitor, external 43, 46 N network jack 26 network, connecting computer to 35 New Connection Wizard A2 O operating environment specifications C1 operating system, version number 48 optical drive, identifying 25 overheating, computer 34, 45 P PC Card slot, identifying 24 ports 1394 24 external monitor 26 USB 24, 25 power running the computer on battery 16 turning on computer 17, 42 power button, identifying 22 power connector identifying 24 using 15 Getting Started Index3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index software antivirus 31 setup 18 updates 37 speakers, identifying 23 specifications operating environment C1 rated input power C2 Standby 43 S-Video-out jack, identifying 26 T technical support 48 temperature safety considerations 34 specifications C1 troubleshooting 45 TouchPad buttons, identifying 22 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 22 TouchPad, identifying 22 traveling with computer C2 troubleshooting display problems 43 external device problems 46 Hibernation or Standby problems 43 overheating problems 45 resources 41 software problems 44 virus problems 44 wireless network problems 46 turning off computer 38 turning on computer 16, 42 U updates, software 37 USB ports, identifying 24, 25 user guides 38 V vents identifying 24, 27 precautions 45 viruses antivirus software 31 computer 44 volume mute button, identifying 22 volume scroll zone, identifying 22 W wireless button, identifying 22 wireless lights, identifying 22, 23 WLAN (wireless local area network) 35 WLAN antennae, identifying 28 WLAN module compartment 27 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 35 WWAN antenna 28 Index4 Getting Started

Notebook Tour User Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435751-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. ENWW iii iv Product notice ENWW Table of contents 1 Identifying Hardware 2 Components Top components ................................................................................................................................... 3 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................ 3 Lights ................................................................................................................................... 4 Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader ............................................................................ 7 Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Front components .............................................................................................................................. 10 Rear components ............................................................................................................................... 11 Right-side components ....................................................................................................................... 12 Left-side components ......................................................................................................................... 13 Bottom components ........................................................................................................................... 14 Wireless antennae (select models only) ............................................................................................. 15 Additional hardware components ....................................................................................................... 16 3 Labels Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 ENWW v vi ENWW 1 Identifying Hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Select Start > My Computer. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, select View system information. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. ENWW 1 2 Components 2 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. ENWW Top components 3 Lights NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Caps lock light Num lock light Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Computer sound is off. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to decrease speaker volume. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to increase speaker volume. 4 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Component

(8) Battery light

(9) Drive light Description Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the internal hard drive.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. ENWW Top components 5 Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Caps lock light Num lock light Battery light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. Blinking: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. On: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level.

(6) Drive light Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. 6 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power button Internal display switch Info button Wireless button

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in Standby, press the button briefly to exit Standby. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Launches Info Center, which enables you to open various software solutions. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Presentation button Volume mute button Starts the presentation feature. Mutes and restores speaker sound. ENWW Top components 7 Component

(7) Volume scroll zone

(8)

(9) Internal microphone Fingerprint reader Description Adjusts speaker volume. Slide your finger to the left to decrease volume and to the right to increase volume. You can also tap the minus sign on the scroll zone to decrease volume, or tap the plus sign on the scroll zone to increase volume. Records sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Component

(1) Power button

(2)

(3) Internal display switch Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in Standby, press the button briefly to exit Standby. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. 8 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Keys NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. ENWW Top components 9 Front components Component

(1) Wireless light

(2) Power light

(3) Battery light

(4) Drive light Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber (select models only): HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive.

(5)

(6) Speakers Display release latch Produce sound. Opens the computer. 10 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Rear components Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(2)

(3)

(4) RJ-45 (network) jack External monitor port Connects a network cable. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. S-Video-out jack (select models only) Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. ENWW Rear components 11 Right-side components Component Description

(1) Media Card Reader (select models only) Supports the following optional digital card formats: Secure Digital

(SD) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard (MMC), Memory Stick (MS), Memory Stick Pro (MSPro), Memory Stick Duo Adapter, xD-Picture Card (XD).

(2)

(3)

(4) USB ports (2) (select models only) Connect an optional USB device. Optical drive RJ-11 (modem) jack Reads an optical disc. Connects a modem cable. 12 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) PC Card slot PC Card eject button Power connector Vent USB ports (2) Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack 1394 port (select models only) Supports optional Type I or Type II 32bit (CardBus) or 16bit PC Cards. Ejects a PC Card from the PC Card slot. Connects an AC adapter. Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connect optional USB devices. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 or 1394a device, such as a camcorder. ENWW Left-side components 13 Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Bluetooth compartment (select models only) Contains a Bluetooth device. Vents Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Accessory battery connector SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional accessory battery. Contains a subscriber identity module (SIM). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Battery bay Holds the battery. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Docking connector (select models only) Connects an optional docking device. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. WLAN module compartment (select models only) Contains a WLAN (wireless local area network) module slot.

(10) Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 14 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Description

(1)

(2) WLAN antennae (2) (select models only)*

WWAN antenna (select models only)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWAN).

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) 15 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable (select models only)*

Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only)*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 16 Chapter 2 Components ENWW 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity (select models only)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the memory module compartment. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, an HP Broadband Wireless Module, or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the memory module compartment. SIM (subscriber identity module) label (select models only)Provides the ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier) of your SIM. This label is located inside the battery bay. HP Broadband Wireless Module serial number label (select models only)Provides the serial number of your HP Broadband Wireless Module. This label is located inside the battery bay. ENWW 17 Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 13 A AC adapter, identifying 16 accessory battery connector, identifying 14 applications key, Windows 9 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 13 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 13 B battery bay 14, 17 battery light, identifying 5, 6, 10 battery release latch, identifying 14 battery, identifying 16 bays battery 14, 17 hard drive 14 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 14 Bluetooth label 17 buttons info 7 PC Card eject 13 power 7, 8 Presentation 7 TouchPad 3 volume mute 7 wireless 7, 8 C caps lock light, identifying 4, 6 Certificate of Authenticity label 17 compartment memory module 14 WLAN module 14 18 Index components additional hardware 16 bottom 14 front 10 left-side 13 rear 11 right-side 12 top 3 wireless antennae 15 connector, power 13 cord, power 16 country-specific modem cable adapter 16 D display release latch, identifying 10 display switch, identifying 7 docking connector, identifying 14 drive light, identifying 5, 6, 10 E esc key, identifying 9 external monitor port, identifying 11 F fingerprint reader, identifying 8 fn key, identifying 9 function keys, identifying 9 H hard drive bay, identifying 14 headphone (audio-out) jack 13 HP Broadband Wireless Module label 17 I IEEE 1394 port, identifying 13 info button, identifying 7 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 8 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 13 audio-out (headphone) 13 RJ-11 (modem) 12 RJ-45 (network 11 S-Video-out 11 K keypad keys, identifying 9 keys esc 9 fn 9 function 9 keypad 9 Windows applications 9 Windows logo 9 L labels Bluetooth 17 HP Broadband Wireless Module 17 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 17 modem approval 17 regulatory 17 service tag 17 SIM 17 wireless certification 17 WLAN 17 latch, battery release 14 lights battery 5, 6, 10 caps lock 4, 6 drive 5, 6, 10 ENWW mute 4 num lock 4, 6 power 4, 6, 10 volume down 4 volume mute 4 volume up 4 wireless 4, 10 M Media Card Reader, identifying 12 memory module compartment, identifying 14 microphone (audio-in) jack 13 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 modem approval label 17 modem cable 16 monitor port, external 11 mute button, identifying 7 mute light, identifying 4 N num lock light, identifying 4, 6 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 Product Key 17 optical drive, identifying 12 P PC Card eject button, identifying 13 PC Card slot, identifying 13 ports 1394 13 external monitor 11 USB 12, 13 power button, identifying 7, 8 power connector, identifying 13 power cord, identifying 16 power light, identifying 10 power lights, identifying 4, 6 Presentation button, identifying 7 Product Key 17 product name and number, computer 17 wireless light, identifying 4, 10 WLAN antennae, identifying 15 WLAN device 17 WLAN label 17 WLAN module compartment, identifying 14 WWAN antenna, identifying 15 R regulatory information modem approval label 17 regulatory label 17 wireless certification labels 17 release latch, battery 14 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 12 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 11 S S-Video-out jack, identifying 11 scrolling regions, TouchPad 3 security cable slot, identifying 11 serial number, computer 17 service tag 17 SIM label 17 SIM slot, identifying 14 slots Media Card Reader 12 memory module 14 speaker, identifying 10 T TouchPad buttons 3 identifying 3 scrolling regions 3 traveling with the computer modem approval label 17 wireless certification labels 17 U USB ports, identifying 12, 13 V vent 13 vents, identifying 14 volume down light, identifying 4 volume mute button, identifying 7 volume mute light, identifying 4 volume scroll zone, identifying 8 volume up light, identifying 4 W Windows applications key, identifying 9 Windows logo key, identifying 9 wireless button, identifying 7, 8 wireless certification label 17 ENWW Index 19

Notebook Tour User Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435813-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. ENWW iii iv Product notice ENWW Table of contents 1 Identifying Hardware 2 Components Top components ................................................................................................................................... 3 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................ 3 Lights ................................................................................................................................... 4 Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader ............................................................................ 7 Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Front components .............................................................................................................................. 10 Rear components ............................................................................................................................... 11 Right-side components ....................................................................................................................... 12 Left-side components ......................................................................................................................... 13 Bottom components ........................................................................................................................... 14 Wireless antennae (select models only) ............................................................................................. 15 Additional hardware components ....................................................................................................... 16 3 Labels Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 ENWW v vi ENWW 1 Identifying Hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. ENWW 1 2 Components 2 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Mouse. ENWW Top components 3 Lights NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Caps lock light Num lock light Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Computer sound is off. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to decrease speaker volume. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to increase speaker volume. 4 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Component

(8) Battery light

(9) Drive light Description Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the internal hard drive.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. ENWW Top components 5 Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Caps lock light Num lock light Battery light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. Blinking: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. On: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level.

(6) Drive light Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. 6 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power button Internal display switch Info button Wireless button

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Launches Info Center, which enables you to open various software solutions. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Presentation button Volume mute button Starts the presentation feature. Mutes and restores speaker sound. ENWW Top components 7 Component

(7) Volume scroll zone

(8)

(9) Internal microphone Fingerprint reader Description Adjusts speaker volume. Slide your finger to the left to decrease volume and to the right to increase volume. You can also tap the minus sign on the scroll zone to decrease volume, or tap the plus sign on the scroll zone to increase volume. Records sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Component

(1) Power button

(2)

(3) Internal display switch Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. 8 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Keys NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. ENWW Top components 9 Front components Component

(1) Wireless light

(2) Power light

(3) Battery light

(4) Drive light Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber (select models only): HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive.

(5)

(6) Speakers Display release latch Produce sound. Opens the computer. 10 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Rear components Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(2)

(3)

(4) RJ-45 (network) jack External monitor port Connects a network cable. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. S-Video-out jack (select models only) Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. ENWW Rear components 11 Right-side components Component Description

(1) Media Card Reader (select models only) Supports the following optional digital card formats: Secure Digital

(SD) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard (MMC), Memory Stick (MS), Memory Stick Pro (MSPro), Memory Stick Duo Adapter, xD-Picture Card (XD).

(2)

(3)

(4) USB ports (2) (select models only) Connect an optional USB device. Optical drive RJ-11 (modem) jack Reads an optical disc. Connects a modem cable. 12 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) PC Card slot PC Card eject button Power connector Vent USB ports (2) Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack 1394 port (select models only) Supports optional Type I or Type II 32bit (CardBus) or 16bit PC Cards. Ejects a PC Card from the PC Card slot. Connects an AC adapter. Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connect optional USB devices. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 or 1394a device, such as a camcorder. ENWW Left-side components 13 Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Bluetooth compartment (select models only) Contains a Bluetooth device. Vents Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Accessory battery connector SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional accessory battery. Contains a subscriber identity module (SIM). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Battery bay Holds the battery. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Docking connector (select models only) Connects an optional docking device. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. WLAN module compartment (select models only) Contains a WLAN (wireless local area network) module slot.

(10) Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 14 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Description

(1)

(2) WLAN antennae (2) (select models only)*

WWAN antenna (select models only)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWAN).

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) 15 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable (select models only)*

Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only)*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 16 Chapter 2 Components ENWW 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity (select models only)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the memory module compartment. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, an HP Broadband Wireless Module, or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the memory module compartment. SIM (subscriber identity module) label (select models only)Provides the ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier) of your SIM. This label is located inside the battery bay. HP Broadband Wireless Module serial number label (select models only)Provides the serial number of your HP Broadband Wireless Module. This label is located inside the battery bay. ENWW 17 Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 13 A AC adapter, identifying 16 accessory battery connector, identifying 14 applications key, Windows 9 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 13 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 13 B battery bay 14, 17 battery light, identifying 5, 6, 10 battery release latch, identifying 14 battery, identifying 16 bays battery 14, 17 hard drive 14 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 14 Bluetooth label 17 buttons info 7 PC Card eject 13 power 7, 8 Presentation 7 TouchPad 3 volume mute 7 wireless 7, 8 C caps lock light, identifying 4, 6 Certificate of Authenticity label 17 compartment memory module 14 WLAN module 14 18 Index components additional hardware 16 bottom 14 front 10 left-side 13 rear 11 right-side 12 top 3 wireless antennae 15 connector, power 13 cord, power 16 D display release latch, identifying 10 display switch, identifying 7 docking connector, identifying 14 drive light, identifying 5, 6, 10 E esc key, identifying 9 external monitor port, identifying 11 F fingerprint reader, identifying 8 fn key, identifying 9 function keys, identifying 9 H hard drive bay, identifying 14 headphone (audio-out) jack 13 HP Broadband Wireless Module label 17 I IEEE 1394 port, identifying 13 info button, identifying 7 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 8 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 13 audio-out (headphone) 13 RJ-11 (modem) 12 RJ-45 (network 11 S-Video-out 11 K keypad keys, identifying 9 keys esc 9 fn 9 function 9 keypad 9 Windows applications 9 Windows logo 9 L labels Bluetooth 17 HP Broadband Wireless Module 17 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 17 modem approval 17 regulatory 17 service tag 17 SIM 17 wireless certification 17 WLAN 17 latch, battery release 14 lights battery 5, 6, 10 caps lock 4, 6 drive 5, 6, 10 mute 4 num lock 4, 6 ENWW power 4, 6, 10 volume down 4 volume mute 4 volume up 4 wireless 4, 10 M Media Card Reader, identifying 12 memory module compartment, identifying 14 microphone (audio-in) jack 13 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 modem approval label 17 monitor port, external 11 mute button, identifying 7 mute light, identifying 4 N num lock light, identifying 4, 6 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 Product Key 17 optical drive, identifying 12 P PC Card eject button, identifying 13 PC Card slot, identifying 13 ports 1394 13 external monitor 11 USB 12, 13 power button, identifying 7, 8 power connector, identifying 13 power cord, identifying 16 power light, identifying 10 power lights, identifying 4, 6 Presentation button, identifying 7 Product Key 17 product name and number, computer 17 R regulatory information modem approval label 17 regulatory label 17 wireless certification labels 17 release latch, battery 14 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 12 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 11 WLAN device 17 WLAN label 17 WLAN module compartment, identifying 14 WWAN antenna, identifying 15 S S-Video-out jack, identifying 11 scrolling regions, TouchPad 3 security cable slot, identifying 11 serial number, computer 17 service tag 17 SIM label 17 SIM slot, identifying 14 slot memory module 14 slots Media Card Reader 12 speaker, identifying 10 T TouchPad buttons 3 identifying 3 scrolling regions 3 traveling with the computer modem approval label 17 wireless certification labels 17 U USB ports, identifying 12, 13 V vent 13 vents, identifying 14 volume down light, identifying 4 volume mute button, identifying 7 volume mute light, identifying 4 volume scroll zone, identifying 8 volume up light, identifying 4 W Windows applications key, identifying 9 Windows logo key, identifying 9 wireless button, identifying 7, 8 wireless certification label 17 wireless light, identifying 4, 10 WLAN antennae, identifying 15 ENWW Index 19

435816-001.book Page i Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC Document Part Number: 435816-001 March 2007 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, and begin using the computer in Windows. 435816-001.book Page ii Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435816-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. 435816-001.book Page iii Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware . 11 Setting up the computer . 13 Step 1: Insert the battery . 14 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power. 15 Step 3: Turn on the computer . 16 Step 4: Set up the software . 18 Step 5: Create recovery discs (recommended) . 18 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware . 21 Top components . 22 Front components . 23 Left-side components . 24 Right-side components . 25 Rear components . 26 Bottom components. 27 Wireless antennae (select models only). 28 Getting Started iii 435816-001.book Page iv Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents 3 Next steps Protecting the computer . 31 Protecting the computer from viruses . 31 Protecting your system files . 32 Protecting your privacy . 32 Protecting the computer from power surges . 32 Using the computer safely . 33 Connecting to a computer network . 35 Installing additional hardware and software . 36 Identifying and installing hardware. 36 Locating and installing software . 36 Updating the software installed on the computer. 37 Finding the user guides . 38 Turning off the computer correctly . 38 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 41 Quick troubleshooting . 42 The computer is unable to start up. 42 The computer screen is blank . 43 Software is functioning abnormally . 44 The computer is turned on but not responding . 44 The computer is unusually warm. 45 An external device is not working. 46 The WLAN connection is not working . 46 Help and Support . 47 Contacting technical support . 48 A Connect to the Internet from your home Choosing an ISP. A1 Using the New Connection Wizard . A2 Choosing the type of Internet connection . A2 iv Getting Started 435816-001.book Page v Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs . B1 Backing up your information . B2 When to back up . B2 Back up suggestions . B3 Backing up specific files or folders . B4 Backing up the entire hard drive . B4 Creating recovery points . B5 Scheduling backups . B6 Performing a recovery . B7 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs. B7 Performing a recovery from the hard drive . B8 C Specifications Operating environment. C1 Rated input power . C2 Index Getting Started v 435816-001.book Page vi Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. Getting Started 11 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Component 1 Power cord Component 4 Country-specific modem adapter

(select models only) 2 AC adapter 5 Modem cable (select models only)

(optional for setup) 3 Primary battery Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. Unless you use dial-up networking, the modem cable is optional for setup. 12 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Setting up the computer Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. Inserting the battery into the computer 2. Connecting the computer to external power The battery begins to charge. 3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for instructions. CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Getting Started 13 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery To insert a primary battery:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 2. Slide the battery 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. The battery release latches 2 automatically lock the battery into place. 14 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 2: Connect the computer to external power Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector 1 on the computer. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2. 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet 3. Getting Started 15 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. Step 3: Turn on the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch 1 to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display 2. 16 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup To turn on the computer:

Press the power button 1. The power light on the power button 2 turns on. Getting Started 17 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 4: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. CAUTION: If you are prompted to select an operating system language, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. For more information about connecting to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home, in this guide. Step 5: Create recovery discs

(recommended) You can create a set of recovery discs of your full factory image using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for detailed instructions. 18 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Getting Started 21 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Top components Component 1 Power button Component 9 Internal microphone

(select models only) 2 Power lights (2)

- TouchPad scroll zone 3 Info button

(select models only) q Fingerprint reader

(select models only) 4 Wireless button w Right TouchPad button 5 Wireless lights (2) e Left TouchPad button 6 Presentation button

(select models only) r Drive light 7 Volume mute button t Battery light 8 Volume scroll zone

(select models only) y TouchPad 22 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Front components Quick tour Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light Component 4 Drive light 5 Speakers (2) 6 Display release latch Getting Started 23 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Left-side components Component Component 1 Power connector 5 Audio-in (microphone) jack 2 Vent 6 1394 port (select models only) 3 USB ports (2) 7 PC Card slot 4 Audio-out (headphone) jack 24 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Right-side components Quick tour Component 1 Media Card Reader

(select models only) 2 USB ports (2)

(select models only) Component 3 Optical drive 4 RJ-11 (modem) jack Getting Started 25 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Rear components Component Component 1 Security cable slot 3 External monitor port 2 RJ-45 (network) jack 4 S-Video-out jack

(select models only) 26 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Bottom components Quick tour Component 1 Bluetooth compartment

(select models only) 2 Vents (3) Component 6 Battery release latches (2) 7 Docking connector

(select models only) 3 Accessory battery connector 8 Memory module compartment 4 SIM slot (select models only) 9 WLAN module compartment

(select models only) 5 Battery bay

- Hard drive bay Getting Started 27 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Component 1 WLAN antennae (2)

(select models only)*

2 WWAN antenna

(select models only)*

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. 28 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 3 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how your computer can be protected from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, unsafe operation, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. For information about using and updating Norton Internet Security and for purchasing extended update service, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. To access Norton Internet Security, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Getting Started 31 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Protecting your system files The HP Backup & Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for additional information. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. To optimize the computers privacy protection features, observe these practices:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from most computer or electronic retailers in some regions. 32 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Using the computer safely Next steps WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and in Help and Support. To access the guide in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Getting Started 33 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or place the computer on your lap for extended periods. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin for extended periods during operation. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer and the AC adapter to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in Help and Support. To access the notices in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support >

User Guides. 34 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Connecting to a computer network The computer may have the following networking capabilities:

Local area network (LAN) Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) Bluetooth If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. If the computer has a Bluetooth device, you can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to Bluetooth online Help. For information on connecting the computer to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home. Getting Started 35 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Identifying and installing hardware To see a list of hardware installed on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Computer > System properties. 2. In the left pane, click Device Manager. Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Windows online Help for more information. You can also add hardware or modify your device configurations using Device Manager. To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software The computer includes software that is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled on your hard drive. To see a list of the ready-to-use software preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Click Start > All Programs. 2. Click the program you want to open. 36 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Provided on a CD or DVD. To install a software program from a disc, follow these steps:

1. Insert the disc into your optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. Preloaded software. This is software provided on the hard drive but not ready to use. To locate or install preloaded software or drivers, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions and select the check box next to the software program or driver you want to install. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the manufacturers Web site. Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Getting Started 37 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer, select Start > Help and Support. Finding the user guides User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other information resources about using the computer are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides:

Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Turning off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. 38 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 9 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps If you are unable to turn off the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. Getting Started 39 435816-001.book Page 10 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. Access additional information about the computer and Web site links through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. Contact technical support for further assistance. Getting Started 41 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating, and then plug the adapter into an AC outlet. Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 42 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM The computer screen is blank Troubleshooting If the computer is on but the screen is blank: the computer may be in the Sleep state or in Hibernation; the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen; or the display switch may not be functioning properly. Try the following suggestions to resolve the issue:

To exit Sleep or Hibernation, briefly press the power button. Sleep and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Sleep and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel >

System and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneous display on all devices. Press the display switch on the computer to be sure that it moves freely. The display switch is normally located on the upper-left corner of the keyboard. Getting Started 43 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Software is functioning abnormally Follow these suggestions if the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally:

Restart the computer by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Restart. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 3, Next steps. The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on, but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. 44 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting If you are unable to shut down the computer with this procedure, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Getting Started 45 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with your operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. The WLAN connection is not working If a WLAN connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Be sure that the wireless light on the computer is on. If the light is off, press the wireless button to turn it on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected, and the lights are on. 46 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting If applicable, be sure that the wireless router (access point) is turned on and properly connected to the DSL or the cable modem. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For information on setting up a home wireless network connection, visit http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless

(English only). For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. Help and Support If the preceding questions and solutions did not address your problem, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Help and Support provides the following assistance:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications Answers to questions about using the computer Product information to help you learn to use the computer and operating system features Updates for the operating system, device drivers, and software provided on the computer Checkups for computer functionality Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures Links to community forums of IT experts Getting Started 47 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to get online help or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > System Information. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support >

System Information. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). 48 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM A Connect to the Internet from your home The computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must choose an Internet service provider (ISP) and choose the type of Internet connection you want, such as broadband

(wired or wireless) or dial-up. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choosing an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes the New Connection Wizard to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started A1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Connect to the Internet from your home Using the New Connection Wizard The New Connection Wizard works under the following conditions:

You already have an account with an ISP. You have a disc from an ISP. You do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. You have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard, select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling the Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. Choosing the type of Internet connection You can choose one or more of the following methods to connect to the Internet:

Broadband serviceHigh-speed Internet access is provided by an ISP through one of the following services:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services Broadband service may require additional hardware and/or software provided by the ISP. A2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Connect to the Internet from your home WLANInternet connection through a WLAN requires broadband wired service with an ISP as well as a wireless router (purchased separately). To learn about setting up wireless access, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). WWANThis broadband wireless connection allows your computer to stay connected to the Internet over large geographic areas while the computer is in motion, such as in a car or train. WWAN capability requires an integrated HP Broadband Wireless Module (select models only) and service from a mobile network operator. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer or see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/broadbandwireless

(English only). Dial-upYou can access the Internet by dialing in to a service provider using a modem cable connected to the RJ-11

(modem) jack. Getting Started A3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media (purchased separately). Formatted DVDRW discs and DVDRW double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup & Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create a set of recovery discs

(Recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. Getting Started B1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To create a set of recovery discs,:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create a set of recovery discs (Recommended), and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup & Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backing up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software B2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Back up suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup & Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

1. Display the screen. 2. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit >

Paste. Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. Drivers, utilities, and applications installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Getting Started B3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Backing up specific files or folders You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Back up user created files and folders and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. B4 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To back up your entire hard drive:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Entire Drive Backups, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. Getting Started B5 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly or monthly) or at specific events, such as at system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup Scheduler. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. B6 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup & Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup &

Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup &

Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Getting Started B7 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Perform a recovery, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. 3. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. B8 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM C Specifications Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started C1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. C2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index Bluetooth 35 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 27 buttons info 22 power 17, 22 presentation 22 TouchPad 22 volume mute 22 wireless 22 C cables and cords, power 42 compartments Bluetooth 27 memory module 27 WLAN 27 computer turn off 38 turn on 16 computer viruses 44 connecting the computer to external power 15 connecting to a computer network 35 1394 port, identifying 24 A AC adapter connecting 15 identifying 12 accessory battery connector, identifying 27 altitude specifications C1 antivirus software 44 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 24 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 24 B battery charging 16 indentifying 12 inserting 14 battery bay, identifying 27 battery light behavior 16 identifying 22, 23 battery release latch, identifying 27 bays battery 27 hard drive 27 Getting Started Index1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index connectors accessory battery 27 docking 27 power 24 country-specific modem adapter 12 D devices, external, troubleshooting 46 display release latch, identifying 23 display, switching image 43 docking connector, identifying 27 drive light, identifying 22, 23 E environmental specifications C1 external devices, troubleshooting 46 external monitor port, identifying 26 F fingerprint reader, identifying 22 firewalls 32 H hard drive bay, identifying 27 Help and Support 47 Hibernation 43 humidity specifications C1 I IEC 60950 compliance 34 image, switching among display devices 43 info button, identifying 22 inserting the battery 14 internal microphone, identifying 22 Internet access A2 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 24 audio-out (headphone) 24 RJ-11 (modem) 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S-Video-out 26 L labels, service tag 48 LAN (local area network) 35 latches battery release 27 display release 23 lights battery 16, 22, 23 drive 22, 23 power 17, 22, 23 wireless 22, 23 locating user guides 38 M Media Card Reader, identifying 25 memory module compartment, identifying 27 Index2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM modem setting up Internet service A2 surge protection 32 modem cable 12 monitor, external 43, 46 N network jack 26 network, connecting computer to 35 New Connection Wizard A2 O operating environment specifications C1 operating system, version number 48 optical drive, identifying 25 overheating, computer 34, 45 P PC Card slot, identifying 24 ports 1394 24 external monitor 26 USB 24, 25 power running the computer on battery 16 turning on computer 17, 42 power button, identifying 22 power connector identifying 24 using 15 Index power cord connecting 15 identifying 12 power light 17, 42 power lights, identifying 22, 23 power surge 32 presentation button, identifying 22 printer 46 Product Id 48 R rated input power specifications C2 registration number, operating system 48 regulatory information notices 34 Regulatory, Safety and Envi-

ronmental Notices 34 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 25 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 26 S Safety and Comfort Guide 33 scroll zone, TouchPad 22 serial number, computer 48 service tag 48 seurity cable slot, identifying 26 SIM slot, identifying 27 Sleep 43 slot, SIM 27 Getting Started Index3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index software antivirus 31 setup 18 updates 37 speakers, identifying 23 specifications operating environment C1 rated input power C2 S-Video-out jack, identifying 26 T technical support 48 temperature safety considerations 34 specifications C1 troubleshooting 45 TouchPad buttons, identifying 22 TouchPad, identifying 22 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 22 traveling with computer C2 troubleshooting display problems 43 external device problems 46 Hibernation or Sleep problems 43 overheating problems 45 resources 41 software problems 44 virus problems 44 wireless network problems 46 turning off computer 38 turning on computer 16, 42 U updates, software 37 USB ports, identifying 24, 25 user guides 38 V vents identifying 24, 27 precautions 45 viruses antivirus software 31 computer 44 volume mute button, identifying 22 volume scroll zone, identifying 22 W wireless button, identifying 22 wireless lights, identifying 22, 23 WLAN (wireless local area network) 35 WLAN antennae, identifying 28 WLAN module compartment 27 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 35 WWAN antenna 28 Index4 Getting Started

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Fifth Edition: June 2007 First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 437312-005 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice ............................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................... 2 Cables ..................................................................................................................... 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ........................................................................................................................ 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Broadband Wireless Modules ......................... 3 Brazilian notice ........................................................................................................................ 4 Wireless LAN certification markings ............................................................................ 4 Canadian notices ..................................................................................................................... 4 Avis Canadien ......................................................................................................................... 5 European Union notices ............................................................................................................ 5 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices ................................................................ 6 France ...................................................................................................... 6 Italy .......................................................................................................... 6 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices ................................................................... 6 Products with HP Broadband Wireless Modules ............................................................ 7 Ergonomics notice ..................................................................................................... 7 Germany .................................................................................................. 7 Indian notice ........................................................................................................................... 7 Japanese notices ...................................................................................................................... 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices .................................................................................. 8 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices .................................................................................. 8 Wireless LAN certification markings ............................................................................ 8 Bluetooth devices .................................................................................................... 10 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices ................................................................ 10 Korean notice ........................................................................................................................ 11 Singaporean wireless notice .................................................................................................... 11 Taiwan notice ........................................................................................................................ 11 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................ 11 Battery notices ....................................................................................................................... 11 ENERGY STAR compliance ..................................................................................................... 12 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................... 12 Modem notices ...................................................................................................................... 13 Telecommunications device approvals ....................................................................... 13 U.S. modem statements ............................................................................................ 14 U.S. modem declarations ......................................................................................... 15 Canadian modem statements .................................................................................... 21 Japanese modem statements ..................................................................................... 21 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements .............................................................................. 22 Voice support .......................................................................................... 22 Power cord notice .................................................................................................................. 23 Japanese power cord notice ..................................................................................... 23 Macrovision Corporation notice ............................................................................................... 23 2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice ........................................................................................... 24 Battery notices ....................................................................................................................... 24 Headset and earphone volume level notice ............................................................................... 24 Power cord notices ................................................................................................................. 25 Travel notice .......................................................................................................................... 25 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner .................................. 25 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal ..................................................................................................................... 26 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ................................................................................ 26 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 26 Chinese material content declarations ....................................................................................... 27 Japanese material content declaration ...................................................................................... 29 United States mercury disposal ................................................................................................ 29 Perchlorate material - special handling may apply ...................................................................... 29 Index ................................................................................................................................. 30 iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility. In Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. In the left pane, click Device Manager. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device may not cause harmful interference. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Broadband Wireless Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-

GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. ENWW Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Brazilian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.6 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.6 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted, as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation, is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.8 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.8 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. ENWW Avis Canadien 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The following CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany The following CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France Italy L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz

(Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Products with HP Broadband Wireless Modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The HP Broadband Wireless Module in your notebook is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The SAR information for your computer, including the recommended minimum distance from the body, is available on the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/broadbandwireless. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennae are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/

kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. Ergonomics notice Germany Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Japanese notices ENWW Indian notice 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG has the certification mark below:

The Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

ENWW Japanese notices 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Bluetooth devices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Korean notice Singaporean wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENWW Korean notice 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENERGY STAR compliance Computers bearing the ENERGY STAR logo are compliant with the applicable U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR specifications for Notebook computers. The EPA ENERGY STAR logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. Laser compliance This product may be provided with a device containing a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with US FDA regulations and the IEC 60825-1. The product does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Each laser product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated May 27, 2001; and with IEC 60825-1:1993/A2:2001. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Modem notices WARNING!

always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/

laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. ENWW Modem notices 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point

(e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

ENWW Modem notices 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

18 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

20 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC'97 modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

ENWW Modem notices 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. b. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. 22 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. ENWW Power cord notice 23 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING!

To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Battery notices To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery; short WARNING!

the external contacts on a battery; or dispose of a battery in fire or water. Do not expose a battery to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a WARNING!

replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. 24 Chapter 2 Safety notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notices WARNING!

To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a WARNING!

replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Travel notice WARNING!

power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION:

distribution system. To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable ENWW Power cord notices 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Battery disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service, or the shop where you purchased the product. 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Chinese material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalen t Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel X X X X X X X X X X X Media (CD/DVD/floppy) O Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking decice Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O ENWW Chinese material content declarations 27 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

USB flash memory driveUSB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation "Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment."

NOTE:

conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Japanese material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2005, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. Perchlorate material - special handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. ENWW Japanese material content declaration 29 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index Symbols/Numerics 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 A airline travel notice 11 B battery disposal notice 26 battery notice 11, 24 Brazilian notice 4 C cable grounding notice 25 Canadian modem statement 21 Canadian notices 4 Chinese Material Content Declarations 27 D Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 26 equipment 26 mercury 29 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 26 ENERGY STAR compliance 12 environmental notices 26 equipment disposal notice 26 ergonomics notice 7 European Union notices 5 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 New Zealand 22 U.S. 14 France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 G GS Notice 7 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 24 I Indian notice 7 Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 J Japanese material content declaration 29 Japanese modem statement 21 Japanese notice 7 Japanese power cord notice 23 K Korean notice 11 L laser safety notice 12 M Macrovision Corporation notice 23 mercury disposal notice 29 modem notices 13 modem statements Canadian 21 Japanese 21 N New Zealand modem statement 22 notices airline travel 11 battery 11, 24, 26 Brazilian 4 Canadian 4 environmental 26 equipment disposal 26 ergonomics 7 European Union 5 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 24 Indian 7 Japanese 7 Japanese power cord 23 Korean 11 laser safety 12 Macrovision Corporation 23 mercury disposal 29 modem 13 perchlorate material 29 power cords 23, 25 Singaporean 11 Taiwan 11 travel 25 P power cord notice 23, 25 S Singaporean wireless notice 11 30 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

T Taiwan notice 11 travel notice 25 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 25 U U.S. modem statement 14 V voice support 22 W wireless LAN devices 3 ENWW Index 31 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Regulatory Statements to be included in the Users Guide for Sputnik USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. During normal operation of notebooks:

To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. During normal operation of tablet PCs:

To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). For lap-held operation, this notebook has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure limits. Nevertheless, the notebook shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except for optional Bluetooth transmitter (FCC ID: QDS-

BRCM1018).

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Energy Star is a U.S. registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 437312-002 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..................................................................................................................................... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices .................................................................................... 3 Brazilian notice ..................................................................................................................................... 4 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 4 Canadian notices .................................................................................................................................. 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 5 European Union notices ....................................................................................................................... 5 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices ...................................................................... 6 France ................................................................................................................. 6 Italy ...................................................................................................................... 6 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices ......................................................................... 6 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Indian notice ......................................................................................................................................... 7 Japanese notices ................................................................................................................................. 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 9 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices ........................................................................ 9 Korean notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Singaporean wireless notice .............................................................................................................. 10 Taiwan notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................. 10 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 10 Energy Star compliance ..................................................................................................................... 11 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 12 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 12 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 13 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 14 Canadian modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 Japanese modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 21 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Voice support .................................................................................................... 21 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 22 Japanese power cord notice .............................................................................................. 22 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 22 2 Safety notices Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 23 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 23 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 24 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal .................................................................................................................................. 25 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 25 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 25 Chinese material content declarations ............................................................................................... 26 Japanese material content declaration ............................................................................................... 28 United States mercury disposal .......................................................................................................... 28 Perchlorate material - special handling may apply ............................................................................. 28 Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 29 iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility. In Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. In Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm

(8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. ENWW Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Brazilian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.6 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.6 dBi 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted, as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation, is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.8 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.8 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. The following CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany ENWW Avis Canadien 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The following CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Ergonomics notice Germany Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Japanese notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

ENWW Indian notice 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Bluetooth devices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

ENWW Japanese notices 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Korean notice Singaporean wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Energy Star compliance Computers bearing the Energy Star logo are compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

(EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. Laser compliance This product may be provided with a device containing a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with US FDA regulations and the IEC 60825-1. The product does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Each laser product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated May 27, 2001; and with IEC 60825-1:1993/A2:2001. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. ENWW Energy Star compliance 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country in which the product is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when you select a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. ENWW Modem notices 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

18 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC'97 modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

20 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. ENWW Modem notices 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 22 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Safety notices Battery notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery;

short the external contacts on a battery; or dispose of a battery in fire or water. Do not expose a battery to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in clause 7 of EN 50332-2. If a headset or earphones are shipped with this product, they are in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. ENWW Battery notices 23 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 24 Chapter 2 Safety notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Battery disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service, or the shop where you purchased the product. ENWW Battery disposal 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Chinese material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Chinese material content declarations 27 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Japanese material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2005, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. Perchlorate material - special handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index Symbols/Numerics 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 A airline travel notice 10 B battery disposal notice 25 battery notice 10, 23 Brazilian notice 4 C Canadian modem statement 20 Canadian notices 4 Chinese Material Content Declarations 26 D Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 25 equipment 25 mercury 28 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 25 Energy Star compliance 11 environmental notices 25 equipment disposal notice 25 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 5 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 ENWW France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 23 I Indian notice 7 Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 J Japanese material content declaration 28 Japanese modem statement 20 Japanese notice 7 Japanese power cord notice 22 K Korean notice 10 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice 22 mercury disposal notice 28 modem notices 12 modem statements Canadian 20 Japanese 20 New Zealand 21 U.S. 13 N New Zealand modem statement 21 notices airline travel 10 battery 10, 23, 25 Brazilian 4 Canadian 4 environmental 25 equipment disposal 25 ergonomics 6 European Union 5 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 23 Indian 7 Japanese 7 Japanese power cord 22 Korean 10 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 22 mercury disposal 28 modem 12 perchlorate material 28 power cords 22, 23 Singaporean 10 Taiwan 10 travel 24 P power cord notice 22, 23 S Singaporean wireless notice 10 Index 29 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

T Taiwan notice 10 travel notice 24 U U.S. modem statement 13 V voice support 21 W wireless LAN devices 3 30 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Notebook Tour User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 431179-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Identifying Hardware 2 Top components TouchPad ............................................................................................................................................. 2 Keys ..................................................................................................................................................... 3 Hotkey quick reference ......................................................................................................................... 4 3 Display Display components ............................................................................................................................. 5 Quick Launch buttons ........................................................................................................................... 6 Media buttons ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Display lights ........................................................................................................................................ 8 Wireless antennae (select models only) ............................................................................................... 9 WWAN antenna ................................................................................................................................. 10 4 Front components 5 Rear components 6 Right-side components 7 Left-side components 8 Bottom components 9 Additional hardware components 10 Labels Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 20 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Identifying Hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select Start > Computer > Properties. In the left pane, click Hardware and Device Settings. In the Windows Security dialog box, click Allow. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Top components TouchPad Component

(1) TouchPad light

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

TouchPad on/off button Description Blue: TouchPad is enabled. Amber: TouchPad is disabled. Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down. Enables/disables the TouchPad.

*This table describes factory settings. To view and change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel >

Hardware and Sound > Mouse. In the Windows Security dialog box, click Allow. 2 Chapter 2 Top components ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Microsoft Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. ENWW Keys 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Hotkey quick reference To perform this function Display information. Clear system information. Open the Help and Support Center. Open the Print Options window. Open a Web browser. Alternate between computer display and external display. Initiate the Sleep state. Initiate QuickLock. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Play, pause, or resume an audio CD or a DVD. Stop an audio CD or a DVD. Press fn+esc fn+esc or press enter fn+f1 fn+f2 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f5 fn+f6 fn+f7 fn+f8 fn+f9 fn+f10 Play the previous track or section on an audio CD or a DVD. fn+f11 Play the next track on an audio CD or a DVD. fn+12 4 Chapter 2 Top components ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Display Display components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Rotating hinge Internal display switch Swivels the display and converts the computer from notebook mode into tablet PC mode or vice versa. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the computer is turned on. Fingerprint reader Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Integrated camera (select models only) Records video and captures still photographs. Display release latch Opens the computer. ENWW Display components 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Quick Launch buttons Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Rotate button Mobility Center button Media button Description Switches the image between landscape and portrait orientation. Press to open Mobility Center. When the computer is On, the media button opens the music program or Media menu, allowing you to select a multimedia program. Off, the media button opens the music program or the Media menu, allowing you to select a multimedia program. In the Sleep state, the media button resumes from Sleep into Windows.

(4) DVD button When the computer is On, the DVD button opens the default DVD program to start a DVD in the optical drive. Off, the DVD button opens QuickPlay to start a DVD in the optical drive. If the QuickPlay software is not installed, the computer starts in Windows. In Hibernation, opens QuickPlay to start a DVD in the optical drive. If the QuickPlay software is not installed, the computer resumes from Hibernation. NOTE Refer to the QuickPlay online Help for details on using QuickPlay. 6 Chapter 3 Display ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Media buttons Component Description

(1) Previous/rewind button When a disc is playing in the optical drive:

(2) Play/pause button Press to play the previous track or chapter. Press fn+ this button to rewind. When a disc is in the optical drive and is Not playing, press to play the disc. Playing, press to pause the disc.

(3) Next/fast forward button When a disc is playing in the optical drive:

(4) Stop button Press once to play the next track or chapter. Press fn+ this button to fast forward. When a disc is playing in the optical drive, press to stop the current disc activity. ENWW Media buttons 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Display lights Component

(1) Power light*

(2) Battery light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: A battery is charging. Blinking: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low-battery condition. When the battery reaches a critical low-battery condition, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition.

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Drive light Rotate button light Blinking: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. On: The image is in landscape mode. [PLEASE VERIFY]

Mobility Center button light On: Mobility Center is open. [PLEASE VERIFY]

Media button light DVD button light On: QuickPlay media mode is open. [PLEASE VERIFY]

On: QuickPlay DVD mode is open. [PLEASE VERIFY]

8 Chapter 3 Display ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Wireless antennae (select models only) On select computer models, at least 2 antennae send and receive signals from one or more wireless devices. These antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to your region's section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in the Help and Support Center. NOTE For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

WWAN antenna The wireless antenna inside the display enclosure allows you to connect to a wireless wide-area network

(WWAN), and then to the Internet, using the integrated HP Broadband Wireless module and service from a supported cellular network operator. For more information on HP Broadband Wireless and how to sign up for service, refer to the HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started guide included with your computer. 10 Chapter 3 Display ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

4 Front components Component

(1)

(2) Display release latch Power button*

Description Opens the computer. When the computer is Off, press to turn on the computer. On, press to enter Hibernation. In the Sleep state, briefly press to exit Sleep. In Hibernation, briefly press to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Microsoft Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. Blue: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (LAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is turned on. Amber: an integrated wireless device is turned off. Links the computer to the HP Remote Control. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Produce sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio.

(3) Wireless light

(4)

(5)

(6) Consumer infrared lens Audio-in (microphone) jack Audio-out (headphone) jack ENWW 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

5 Rear components Component

(1) Vent Description Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation.

(2)

(3)

(4) RJ-11 (modem) jack USB port Security cable slot Connects a modem cable. Connects an optional USB device. Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 12 Chapter 5 Rear components ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

6 Right-side components Component Description

(1) Previous/rewind button When a disc is playing in the optical drive:

(2) Play/pause button Press to play the previous track or chapter. Press fn+ this button to rewind. When a disc is in the optical drive and is Not playing, press to play the disc. Playing, press to pause the disc.

(3) Next/fast forward button When a disc is playing in the optical drive:

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Stop button Pen holder USB port Pen tether RJ-45 (network) jack Expansion port 3 Press once to play the next track or chapter. Press fn+ this button to fast forward. When a disc is playing in the optical drive, press to stop the current disc activity. Secures the pen to the computer. Connects an optional USB device. Connects the pen tether Connects a network cable. Connects the computer to an optional expansion product. ENWW 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Component Description

(10)

(11) External monitor port S-Video-out jack NOTE The computer has only one expansion port. The term expansion port 3 describes the type of expansion port. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card.

(12) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. 14 Chapter 6 Right-side components ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

7 Left-side components Component Power connector ExpressCard slot Digital Media Slot

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Digital Media Slot light Optical drive On: A digital card is being accessed. Reads an optical disc. Optical drive release button Releases the optical drive tray. Description Connects an AC adapter. Supports optional ExpressCard/54 cards. Supports the following optional digital card formats: Secure Digital

(SD) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard (MMC), Secure Digital Input/

Output (SD I/O), Memory Stick (MS), Memory Stick Pro (MSP), xD-

Picture Card (XD), xD-Picture Card (XD) Type M. ENWW 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

8 Bottom components Component

(1) Vents (3) Description Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. Optical drive release latch Releases the optical drive from the drive bay. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slots. Mini Card compartment Holds a wireless LAN device (select models only). 16 Chapter 8 Bottom components ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Component Description NOTE To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, replace with only a Mini Card device authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you replace the device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care through the Help and Support Center.

(6)

(7) Battery release latch Battery bay Releases the battery from the battery bay. Holds the battery. ENWW 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

9 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable*

Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only) Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 18 Chapter 9 Additional hardware components ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

10 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact Customer Care. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Microsoft Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed inside the hard drive bay. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the hard drive bay. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the memory module compartment. ENWW 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index A AC adapter, identifying 18 antennae 9 applications key, Windows 3 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 11 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 11 B battery bay 17, 19 battery light, identifying 8 battery release latch, identifying 17 battery, identifying 18 bays battery 17, 19 hard drive 16 Bluetooth label 19 buttons DVD 6 media 6 next/fast forward 7, 13 play/pause 7, 13 power 11 previous/rewind 7, 13 stop 7, 13 TouchPad 2 TouchPad on/off 2 C cable, RJ-11 (modem) 18 Certificate of Authenticity label 19 compartments memory module 16 Mini Card 16 components additional hardware 18 bottom 16 display 5 front 11 left-side 15 rear 12 right-side 13 top 2 connector, power 15 cord, power 18 D Digital Media Slot light, identifying 15 Digital Media Slot, identifying 15 display release latch 5, 11 display switch, identifying 5 drive light, identifying 8 drives hard 16 DVD button, identifying 6 E esc key, identifying 3 expansion port, identifying 13 ExpressCard slot, identifying 15 external monitor port, identifying 14 F fingerprint reader 5 fn key, identifying 3 function keys, identifying 3 H hard drive bay, identifying 16 headphone (audio-out) jack 11 hotkeys, quick reference 4 I infrared lens, identifying 11 integrated camera light, identifying 5 internal display switch, identifying 5 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 11 audio-out (headphone) 11 RJ-11 (modem) 12 RJ-45 (network 13 S-Video-out 14 K keypad keys, identifying 3 keys esc 3 fn 3 function 3 keypad 3 Windows applications 3 Windows logo 3 L labels Bluetooth 19 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 19 modem approval 19 regulatory 19 service tag 19 wireless certification 19 WLAN 19 latch, battery release 17 latches display release 5, 11 lights battery 8 Digital Media Slot 15 drive 8 integrated camera 5 power 8 20 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

TouchPad 2 wireless 11 M media activity buttons, identifying 7, 13 media button, identifying 6 memory module compartment, identifying 16 microphone (audio-in) jack 11 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 19 Mini Card compartment, identifying 16 modem approval label 19 modem cable adapter, identifying 18 monitor port, external 14 N next/fast forward button, identifying 7, 13 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 19 Product Key 19 P play/pause button, identifying 7, 13 ports expansion 13 external monitor 14 USB 13 power button, identifying 11 power connector, identifying 15 power cord, identifying 18 power light, identifying 8 Previous/rewind button, identifying 7, 13 Product Key 19 product name and number, computer 19 R reader, fingerprint 5 regulatory information modem approval label 19 regulatory label 19 wireless certification labels 19 release latch, battery 17 RJ-11 (modem) cable, identifying 18 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 12 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 13 S S-Video-out jack, identifying 14 scrolling regions, TouchPad 2 security cable slot, identifying 12 serial number, computer 19 service tag 19 slots Digital Media 15 ExpressCard 15 memory module 16 security cable 12 stop button, identifying 7, 13 T TouchPad buttons 2 identifying 2 scrolling regions 2 TouchPad light, identifying 2 TouchPad on/off button 2 traveling with the computer modem approval label 19 wireless certification labels 19 U USB ports, identifying 13 V vents, identifying 12, 14, 16 W Windows applications key, identifying 3 Windows logo key, identifying 3 wireless antennae 9 wireless certification label 19 wireless light, identifying 11 WLAN device 19 WLAN label 19 WWAN device 10 ENWW Index 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Dell XPS M1730 Owners Manual Model PP06XA w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Notes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. 2007 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Wi-Fi Catcher, and Dell MediaDirect are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel, and Core are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks and Windows Vista is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Bluetooth is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and is used by Dell under license. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model PP06XA July 2007 P/N TM373 Rev. A00 Contents Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1 About Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Determining Your Computers Configuration . . . . . . 19 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Right Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2 Setting Up Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Setting Up Your Internet Connection . . . . . . . . 26 Transferring Information to a New Computer . . . . . 27 Windows Easy Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Setting Up a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Printer Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Connecting a USB Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Power Protection Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Surge Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Line Conditioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Uninterruptible Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . 30 Contents 3 3 Using the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Adjusting Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Switching the Video Image From Your Computer Display To a Projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Setting Display Resolution and Refresh Rate . . . . . . 32 4 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad . . . . 33 Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Key Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 System Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Display Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless Networking and Bluetooth Wireless Technology Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 34 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microsoft Windows Logo Key Functions . . . . 34 34 Dell QuickSet Key Combinations . . . . . . . . . 35 Adjusting Keyboard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Customizing the Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 5 Using a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Battery Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Checking the Battery Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Dell QuickSet Battery Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . Microsoft Windows Battery Meter . . . . . . . 40 41 Charge Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 4 Contents Low-Battery Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Conserving Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Configuring Power Management Settings . . . . . 42 Using the Sleep Power State . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Storing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 6 Using the Optional Camera . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Accessing the Cameras Help File . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Manually Adjusting the Camera Settings . . . . . . . . 46 Creating a Picture or a Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 7 Using Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Playing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Playing Media Using Dell Express Card Remote Control 49 Copying CD and DVD Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 How to Copy a CD or DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Using Blank CD and DVD Media . . . . . . . . . . 51 Helpful Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Adjusting the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Adjusting the Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Using Dell MediaDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Connecting Your Computer to a TV or Audio Device . . 54 Contents 5 S-Video and Standard Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 S-Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio . . . . . . . . . 58 Composite Video and Standard Audio . . . . . . . 60 Composite Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio . . . . 62 Component Video and Standard Audio . . . . . . 64 Component Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio . . . . 66 Enabling the Display Settings for a TV . . . . . . . 68 8 Using Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 ExpressCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 ExpressCard Blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Installing an ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Removing an ExpressCard or Blank . . . . . . . . 71 Memory Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Memory Card Blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Installing a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Removing a Memory Card or Blank . . . . . . . . 74 9 Setting Up and Using Networks . . . . . . . 75 Connecting a Network or Broadband Modem Cable . . 75 Setting Up a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Wireless Local Area Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 What You Need to Establish a WLAN Connection . 76 Checking Your Wireless Network Card . . . . . . 76 Setting Up a New WLAN Using a Wireless Router and a Broadband Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Connecting to a WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Mobile Broadband (or Wireless Wide Area Network) . 80 6 Contents What You Need to Establish a Mobile Broadband Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Checking Your Dell Mobile Broadband Card . . . . 81 Connecting to a Mobile Broadband Network . . . 82 Enabling/Disabling the Dell Mobile Broadband Card 82 Dell Wi-Fi Catcher Network Locator . . . . . . . . . 83 10 Securing Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Security Cable Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 If Your Computer Is Lost or Stolen . . . . . . . . . . . 86 11 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Dell Technical Update Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Dell Support Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Optical drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Hard drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 E-Mail and Internet Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 ExpressCard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 IEEE 1394 Device Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Keyboard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Contents 7 External Keyboard problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Unexpected characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Lockups and Software Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 The computer does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 The computer stops responding . . . . . . . . . . 103 A program stops responding or crashes repeatedly 104 A program is designed for an earlier Microsoft Windows operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 A solid blue screen appears . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Dell MediaDirect problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Other software problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Memory Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Network Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Mobile Broadband (Wireless Wide Area Network [WWAN]) 107 Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Scanner Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Sound and Speaker Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 No sound from integrated speakers . . . . . . . . 111 No sound from external speakers . . . . . . . . . 111 No sound from headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Remote Control Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Touch Pad or Mouse Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Video and Display Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 If the display is blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 If the display is difficult to read . . . . . . . . . . 114 If only part of the display is readable . . . . . . . 114 8 Contents Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 What Is a Driver? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Identifying Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . 116 Troubleshooting Software and Hardware Problems . . 118 Restoring Your Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Using Microsoft Windows System Restore . . . . 118 Using the Operating System Media . . . . . . . . 119 12 Adding and Replacing Parts . . . . . . . . . 123 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Turning Off Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Before Working Inside Your Computer . . . . . . . 124 Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Returning a Hard Drive to Dell

. . . . . . . . . . . 128 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Mini-Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Hinge Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Coin-Cell Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Internal Card With Bluetooth Wireless Technology . 141 Contents 9 13 Dell QuickSet Features . . . . . . . . . . . 143 14 Traveling With Your Computer . . . . . . . . 145 Identifying Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Packing the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Travel Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Traveling by Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 15 Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Obtaining Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Technical Support and Customer Service . . . . . 148 DellConnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Online Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 AutoTech Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Automated Order-Status Service . . . . . . . . . 149 Problems With Your Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit . . . . . 150 Before You Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 10 Contents 16 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 17 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Using the System Setup Program . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Viewing the System Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . 162 System Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Commonly Used Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Cleaning Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Computer, Keyboard, and Display . . . . . . . . . 164 Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . 166 Definition of "Dell-Installed" Software and Peripherals 167 Definition of "Third-Party" Software and Peripherals 167 FCC Notice (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 FCC Class B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Macrovision Product Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Glossary 169 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Contents 11 12 Contents Finding Information NOTE: Some features may be optional and may not ship with your computer. Some features may not be available in certain countries. NOTE: Additional information may ship with your computer. What Are You Looking For?

Find It Here A diagnostic program for my computer Drivers and Utilities Media Drivers for my computer Documentation and drivers are already Device documentation installed on your computer. You can use Notebook System Software (NSS) the Drivers and Utilities media to reinstall drivers (see "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 116) or run the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics"

on page 87). Readme files may be included on your Drivers and Utilities media to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical-reference material for technicians or experienced users. Warranty information Dell Product Information Guide NOTE: Drivers and documentation updates can be found at support.dell.com. Terms and Conditions (U.S. only) Safety instructions Regulatory information Ergonomics information End User License Agreement Finding Information 13 What Are You Looking For?

How to set up my computer Find It Here Setup Diagram 14 Finding Information What Are You Looking For?

Find It Here Service Tag and Express Service Code Microsoft Windows Product Key Service Tag and Microsoft Windows Product Key These labels are located on your computer. Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you use support.dell.com or contact support. Enter the Express Service Code to direct your call when contacting support. NOTE: As an increased security measure, the newly designed Microsoft Windows license label incorporates a "security portal," which looks like a missing portion of the label, to discourage removal of the label. Finding Information 15 What Are You Looking For?

Find It Here Solutions Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, online courses, and frequently asked questions Dell Support Website support.dell.com NOTE: Select your region or business segment to view the appropriate support site. Community Online discussion with other Dell customers Upgrades Upgrade information for components, such as the memory, hard drive, and operating system Customer Care Contact information, service call and order status, and warranty and repair information Service and support Service call status, support history, service contract, and online discussions with support Dell Technical Update Service Proactive e-mail notification of software and hardware updates for your computer Reference Computer documentation, details on my computer configuration, product specifications, and white papers Downloads Certified drivers, To download Notebook System Software:

patches, and software updates 1 Go to support.dell.com

, select your Notebook System Software (NSS) If country/region, and then click you reinstall the operating system on Drivers & Downloads

. your computer, you should also reinstall the NSS utility. NSS automatically detects your computer and operating 2 3 system, and installs the updates appropriate for your configuration, providing critical updates for your Enter your Service Tag or product model, and then click Go

. Select your operating system and language, and then click Find Downloads Downloads

, or under Search

, search for the keyword operating system and support for Dell Notebook System Software. 3.5-inch USB floppy drives, Intel processors, optical drives, and USB devices. NSS is necessary for correct operation of your Dell computer. NOTE: The support.dell.com user interface may vary depending on your selections. 16 Finding Information What Are You Looking For?

Find It Here Software upgrades and troubleshooting Dell Support Utility hints Frequently asked questions, hot topics, and general health of your computing environment The Dell Support Utility is an automated upgrade and notification system installed on your computer. This support provides real-time health scans of your computing environment, software updates, and relevant self-support information. Access the Dell Support Utility from the icon on the taskbar. For more information, see "Dell Support Utility" on page 91. How to use Windows Vista Windows Help and Support How to work with programs and files How to personalize my desktop 1 2 3 4 Click the Windows Vista Start button

, and then click Help and Support

. In Search Help

, type a word or phrase that describes your problem, and then press <Enter> or click the magnifying glass. Click the topic that describes your problem. Follow the instructions on the screen. Information on network activity, the Dell QuickSet Help hotkeys, and other items controlled by To view Dell QuickSet Help

, right-click Dell QuickSet the Dell QuickSet icon in the Windows notification area. For more information on Dell QuickSet, see "Dell QuickSet Features" on page 143. Finding Information 17 What Are You Looking For?

Find It Here How to reinstall my operating system Operating System Media The operating system is already installed on your computer. To reinstall your operating system, use one of the following methods:

Microsoft Windows System Restore Microsoft Windows System Restore returns your computer to an earlier operating state without affecting data files. Operating System Installation Media If you received operating system media with your computer, you can use it to restore your operating system. For more information, see "Restoring Your Operating System" on page 118. After you reinstall your operating system, use the Drivers and Utilities media to reinstall drivers for the devices that came with your computer. Your operating system product key label is located on your computer. NOTE: The color of your operating system installation media varies according to the operating system you ordered. 18 Finding Information About Your Computer Determining Your Computers Configuration Based on selections that you made when purchasing your computer, your computer has one of several different video controller configurations. To determine your computers video controller configuration:

1 2 3 Click Start

, and then click Help and Support

. Under Pick a Task, click Use Tools to view your computer information and diagnose problems. Under My Computer Information, select Hardware. From the My Computer Information - Hardware screen, you can view the type of video controller installed in your computer, as well as the other hardware components. About Your Computer 19 Front View 5 4 1 2 3 1 media control buttons 3 5 keyboard display 2 4 keyboard status lights power button M E D I A C O N T R O L B U T T O N S Control CD, DVD, and Media Player playback. 20 About Your Computer K E Y B O A R D S T A T U S L I G H T S The blue lights located above the keyboard indicate the following:

9 A Turns on when the numeric keypad is enabled. Turns on when the uppercase letter (caps lock) function is enabled. Turns on when the scroll lock function is enabled. K E Y B O A R D The keyboard includes a numeric keypad as well as the Microsoft Windows logo key. P O W E R B U T T O N Press the power button to turn on the computer or exit a power management mode (see "Configuring Power Management Settings" on page 42). NOTICE: To avoid losing data, turn off your computer by performing a Microsoft Windows operating system shutdown rather than by pressing the power button. If the computer stops responding, press and hold the power button until the computer turns off completely (may take several seconds). D I S P L A Y For more information about your display, see ."Using the Display" on page 31. About Your Computer 21 Left Side View 1 optical drive 1 2 audio connectors 2 O P T I C A L D R I V E For more information about the optical drive, see "Using Multimedia" on page 47. A U D I O C O N N E C T O R S Attach headphones or speakers to the connector. Attach a microphone to the connector. Right Side View 1 2 1 ExpressCard slot 2 security cable slot 22 About Your Computer E X P R E S S C A R D S L O T Supports one ExpressCard, The computer ships with a plastic blank installed in the slot. S E C U R I T Y C A B L E S L O T Lets you attach a commercially available antitheft device to the computer. For more information, see the instructions included with the device. Back View 1 2 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 air vent S - V I D E O TV- O U T C O N N E C T O R Connects your computer to a TV. Also connects digital audio capable devices using the TV/digital audio adapter cable. A I R V E N T The computer uses fan(s) to create airflow through the vents, which prevents the computer from overheating. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. About Your Computer 23 24 About Your Computer Setting Up Your Computer Connecting to the Internet NOTE: ISPs and ISP offerings vary by country. To connect to the Internet, you need a modem or network connection and an Internet service provider (ISP). Your ISP will offer one or more of the following Internet connection options:

DSL connections that provide high-speed Internet access through your existing telephone line or cellular telephone service. With a DSL connection, you can access the Internet and use your telephone on the same line simultaneously. Cable modem connections that provide high-speed Internet access through your local cable TV line. Satellite modem connections that provide high-speed Internet access through a satellite television system. Dial-up connections that provide Internet access through a telephone line. Dial-up connections are considerably slower than DSL, cable, and satellite modem connections. Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) or Mobile Broadband technology provides a connection to the Internet using cellular technology at broadband rates. Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) connections use high-frequency radio waves to communicate. Typically, a wireless router is connected to the broadband cable or DSL modem that broadcasts the Internet signal to your computer. NOTE: Your system does not ship with a modem and hence you will not be able to connect to the Internet using dial-up connections. NOTE: If you are using a DSL, cable, or satellite modem connection, contact your ISP or cellular telephone service for setup instructions. Setting Up Your Computer 25 Setting Up Your Internet Connection To set up an Internet connection with a provided ISP desktop shortcut:

1 2 3 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. Double-click the ISP icon on the Microsoft Windows desktop. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. NOTE: If you are having problems connecting to the Internet, see "E-Mail and Internet Problems" on page 94. If you cannot connect to the Internet, but have successfully connected in the past, the ISP may have a service outage. Contact your ISP to check the service status, or try connecting again later. NOTE: Have your ISP information ready. If you do not have an ISP, the Connect to the Internet wizard can help you obtain one. If you do not have an ISP icon on your desktop or if you want to set up an Internet connection with a different ISP:

1 2 3 4 5 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. Click Start

, and then click Control Panel. Under Network and Internet, click Connect to the Internet. The Connect to the Internet window appears. Click Wireless to configure your WLAN/WWAN card to connect to the Internet. Follow the instructions on the screen and use the setup information provided by your ISP to complete the setup. 26 Setting Up Your Computer Transferring Information to a New Computer You can transfer the following types of data from one computer to another:

E-mail messages Toolbar settings Window sizes Internet bookmarks Use one of the following methods for transferring data:

Windows Easy Transfer wizard, an Easy Transfer Cable, and a USB port Over a network Removable media, such as a writable CD Windows Easy Transfer 1 2 3 4 5 Click Start All Programs Accessories System Tools Windows Easy Transfer. In the User Account Control dialog box, click Continue. Click Next. Click Start a new transfer or Continue a transfer in progress. Follow the instructions in the Windows Easy Transfer wizard. Setting Up a Printer NOTICE: Complete the operating system setup before you connect a printer to the computer. See the documentation that came with the printer for setup information, including how to:

Obtain and install updated drivers. Connect the printer to the computer. Load paper and install the toner or ink cartridge. For technical assistance, refer to the printer owner's manual or contact the printer manufacturer. Setting Up Your Computer 27 Printer Cable Your printer connects to your computer with a USB cable. Your printer may not come with a printer cable, so if you purchase a cable separately, ensure that it is compatible with your printer and computer. If you purchased a printer cable at the same time you purchased your computer, the cable may arrive in the computers shipping box. Connecting a USB Printer NOTE: You can connect USB devices while the computer is turned on. Complete the operating system setup if you have not already done so. Attach the USB printer cable to the USB connectors on the computer and the printer. The USB connectors fit only one way. 1 3 2 USB connector on computer 2 USB connector on printer USB printer cable 1 2 1 3 28 Setting Up Your Computer 3 4 5 6 7 Turn on the printer, and then turn on the computer. If the Add New Hardware Wizard window appears, click Cancel. Click Start

, and then click Network. Click Add a printer to start the Add Printer Wizard. NOTE: To install the printer driver, see "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 116 and the documentation that came with your printer. Click Add a local printer or Add a network, wireless, or Bluetooth printer. Follow the instructions in the Add Printer Wizard. Power Protection Devices Several devices are available to protect against power fluctuations and failures:

Surge protectors Line conditioners Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) Surge Protectors Surge protectors and power strips equipped with surge protection help prevent damage to your computer from voltage spikes that can occur during electrical storms or after power interruptions. Some surge protector manufacturers include warranty coverage for certain types of damage. Carefully read the device warranty when choosing a surge protector. A device with a higher joule rating offers more protection. Compare joule ratings to determine the relative effectiveness of different devices. NOTICE: Most surge protectors do not protect against power fluctuations or power interruptions caused by nearby lightning strikes. When lightning occurs in your area, disconnect the telephone line from the telephone wall jack and disconnect your computer from the electrical outlet. Many surge protectors have a telephone jack for modem protection. See the surge protector documentation for modem connection instructions. NOTICE: Not all surge protectors offer network adapter protection. Disconnect the network cable from the network wall jack during electrical storms. Setting Up Your Computer 29 Line Conditioners NOTICE: Line conditioners do not protect against power interruptions. Line conditioners are designed to maintain AC voltage at a fairly constant level. Uninterruptible Power Supplies NOTICE: Loss of power while data is being saved to the hard drive may result in data loss or file damage. NOTE: To ensure maximum battery operating time, connect only your computer to a UPS. Connect other devices, such as a printer, to a separate power strip that provides surge protection. A UPS protects against power fluctuations and interruptions. UPS devices contain a battery that provides temporary power to connected devices when AC power is interrupted. The battery charges while AC power is available. See the UPS manufacturer documentation for information on battery operating time and to ensure that the device is approved by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 30 Setting Up Your Computer Using the Display Adjusting Brightness When a Dell computer is running on battery power, you can conserve power by setting the display brightness to the lowest comfortable level. Press <Fn> and the up-arrow key to increase brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor). Press <Fn> and the down-arrow key to decrease brightness on the integrated display only (not on an external monitor). NOTE: Brightness key combinations only affect the display on your portable computer, not monitors or projectors that you attach to your portable computer. If your computer is connected to an external monitor and you try to change the brightness level, the Brightness Meter may appear, but the brightness level on the external device does not change. Switching the Video Image From Your Computer Display To a Projector When you start the computer with an external device attached (such as an external monitor or projector) and turned on, the image may appear on either the computer display or the external device. Press <Fn><F8> to switch the video image between the display only, the external device only, or the display and the external device simultaneously. Using the Display 31 Setting Display Resolution and Refresh Rate NOTE: If you change the display resolution from the current settings, the image may appear blurry or text may be hard to read if you change the resolution to one not supported by your computer and display. Before you change any of the display settings, make a note of the current settings so you can change back to the previous settings if needed. You can enhance the legibility of text and change the appearance of images on the screen by adjusting display resolution. As you increase resolution, items appear smaller on the screen. In contrast, lower resolution causes text and images to appear larger and can benefit people with vision impairments. To display a program at a specific resolution, both the video card and the display must support the program, and the necessary video drivers must be installed. NOTE: Use only the Dell-installed video drivers, which are designed to offer the best performance with your Dell-installed operating system. If you choose a resolution or color palette that is higher than the display supports, the settings adjust automatically to the closest supported values. To set the display resolution and refresh rate for your display:

1 2 3 Click Start Control Panel. Under Appearance and Personalization, click Adjust screen resolution. In the Display Settings window, under Resolution, move the slide bar to the left or right to decrease/increase the screen resolution. NOTE: For additional instructions, click How do I get the best display?

32 Using the Display Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Numeric Keypad numeric keypad The numeric keypad functions like the numeric keypad on an external keyboard. Each key on the keypad has multiple functions. The keypad numbers and symbols are marked in blue on the right of the keypad keys. To type a number or symbol, hold down <Fn> and press the desired key. To enable the keypad, press <Num Lk>. The 9 light indicates that the keypad is active. To disable the keypad, press <Num Lk> again. Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad 33 Key Combinations System Functions

<Ctrl><Shift><Esc>

Opens the Task Manager window. Display Functions

<Fn><F8>

Displays icons representing all currently available display options (display only, external monitor or projector only, both display and projector, etc). Highlight the desired icon to switch the display to that option.

<Fn> and up-arrow key Increases brightness on the integrated display only

(not on an external monitor).

<Fn> and down-arrow key Decreases brightness on the integrated display only

(not on an external monitor). Battery

<Fn><F3>

Displays the Dell QuickSet Battery Meter (see

"Dell QuickSet Battery Meter" on page 40). Wireless Networking and Bluetooth Wireless Technology Function

<Fn><F2>

Enables and disables wireless networking and Bluetooth wireless technology. Power Management

<Fn><Esc>

Activates a power management mode. See

"Configuring Power Management Settings" on page 42. Microsoft Windows Logo Key Functions Windows logo key and <m> Minimizes all open windows. 34 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Windows logo key and Restores all minimized windows. This key

<Shift><m>

combination functions as a toggle to restore minimized windows following the use of the Windows logo key and <m> combination. Windows logo key and <e> Starts Windows Explorer. Windows logo key and <r>

Opens the Run dialog box. Windows logo key and <f>

Opens the Search Results dialog box. Windows logo key and Opens the Search Results-Computer dialog box (if

<Ctrl><f>

the computer is connected to a network). Windows logo key and Opens the System Properties dialog box.

<Pause>

Dell QuickSet Key Combinations If Dell QuickSet is installed, you can use other shortcut keys for functions such as the Battery Meter. For more information about Dell QuickSet key combinations, right-click the QuickSet icon in the notification area, and then click Help

. Adjusting Keyboard Settings To adjust keyboard operation, such as the character repeat rate:

1 2 3 Click Start

, and then click Control Panel. Click Hardware and Sound. Click Keyboard. Touch Pad The touch pad detects the pressure and movement of your finger to allow you to move the cursor on the display. Use the touch pad and touch pad buttons as you would use a mouse. Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad 35 To move the cursor, lightly slide your finger over the touch pad. To select an object, lightly tap once on the surface of the touch pad or use your thumb to press the left touch pad button. To select and move (or drag) an object, position the cursor on the object and tap twice on the touch pad. On the second tap, leave your finger on the touch pad and move the selected object by sliding your finger over the surface. To double-click an object, position the cursor on the object and tap twice on the touch pad or use your thumb to press the left touch pad button twice. Customizing the Touch Pad You can use the Mouse Properties window to disable the touch pad or adjust the touch pad settings. 1 2 3 4 5 Click Start

, and then click Control Panel. Click Hardware and Sound. Click Keyboard. In the Mouse Properties window:

Click the Device Select tab to disable the touch pad. Click the Touch Pad tab to adjust touch pad settings. Click OK to save the settings and close the window. 36 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad 37 38 Using the Keyboard and Touch Pad Using a Battery Battery Performance NOTE: For information about the Dell warranty for your computer, see the Product Information Guide or separate paper warranty document that shipped with your computer. For optimal computer performance and to help preserve BIOS settings, operate your Dell portable computer with the main battery installed at all times. One battery is supplied as standard equipment in the battery bay. NOTE: Because the battery may not be fully charged, use the AC adapter to connect your new computer to an electrical outlet the first time you use the computer. For best results, operate the computer with the AC adapter until the battery is fully charged. To view battery charge status, place the mouse cursor over the battery icon in the Windows notification area. NOTE: Battery operating time (the time the battery can hold a charge) decreases over time. Depending on how often the battery is used and the conditions under which it is used, you may need to purchase a new battery during the life of your computer. NOTE: It is recommended that you connect your computer to an electrical outlet when writing to media. Battery operating time varies depending on operating conditions. Operating time is significantly reduced when you perform operations including, but not limited to, the following:

Using optical drives. Using wireless communications devices, ExpressCards, media memory cards, or USB devices. Using high-brightness display settings, 3D screen savers, or other power-

intensive programs such as complex 3D graphics applications. Running the computer in maximum performance mode (see "Configuring Power Management Settings" on page 42 for information about accessing Windows Power Options Properties, which you can use to configure power management settings). Using a Battery 39 You can check the battery charge before you insert the battery into the computer. You can also set power management options to alert you when the battery charge is low. CAUTION: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or explosion. Replace the battery only with a compatible battery purchased from Dell. The battery is designed to work with your Dell computer. Do not use batteries from other computers with your computer. CAUTION: Do not dispose of batteries with household waste. When your battery no longer holds a charge, call your local waste disposal or environmental agency for advice on disposing of a lithium-ion battery (see "Battery Disposal" in the Product Information Guide). CAUTION: Misuse of the battery may increase the risk of fire or chemical burn. Do not puncture, incinerate, disassemble, or expose the battery to temperatures above 65C (149F). Keep the battery away from children. Handle damaged or leaking batteries with extreme care. Damaged batteries may leak and cause personal injury or equipment damage. Checking the Battery Charge You can check the battery charge on your computer using any one of the following methods:

Dell QuickSet Battery Meter Microsoft Windows battery meter icon located in the notification area Battery charge/health gauge located on the battery Low-battery warning pop-up window Dell QuickSet Battery Meter To view the Dell QuickSet Battery Meter:

Double-click the Dell QuickSet icon in the taskbar, and then click Battery Meter or Press <Fn><F3>

The Battery Meter displays the status, battery health, charge level, and charge completion time for the battery in your computer. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the QuickSet icon, and then click Help

. 40 Using a Battery Microsoft Windows Battery Meter The battery meter indicates the remaining battery charge. To check the battery meter, double-click the icon in the notification area. Charge Gauge By either pressing once or pressing and holding the status button on the battery charge gauge, you can check:

Battery charge (check by pressing and releasing the status button) Battery health (check by pressing and holding the status button) The battery operating time is largely determined by the number of times it is charged. After hundreds of charge and discharge cycles, batteries lose some charge capacityor battery health. Therefore, a battery can show a status of charged, but maintain a reduced charge capacity (health). Check the Battery Charge To check the battery charge, the status button on the battery press and release charge gauge to illuminate the charge indicator lights. Each light represents approximately 20 percent of the total battery charge. For example, if the battery has 80 percent of its charge remaining, four of the lights are on. If no lights are on, the battery has no charge. Check the Battery Health NOTE: You can check battery health in one of two ways: by using the charge gauge on the battery, as described below, and by using the Battery Meter in Dell QuickSet. For information about QuickSet, right-click the QuickSet icon in the notification area, and then click Help. To check the battery health using the charge gauge, press and hold the status button on the battery charge gauge for at least 3 seconds to illuminate the health indicator lights. Each light represents incremental degradation. If no lights appear, the battery is in good condition, and more than 80 percent of its original charge capacity remains. If five lights appear, less than 60 percent of the charge capacity remains, and you should consider replacing the battery (see

"Battery" on page 158 for more information about the battery operating time). Using a Battery 41 Low-Battery Warning NOTICE: To avoid losing or corrupting data, save your work immediately after a low-battery warning, then connect the computer to an electrical outlet. If the battery runs completely out of power, Sleep state begins automatically. A pop-up window warns you when the battery charge is approximately 90 percent depleted. The computer enters Sleep state when the battery charge is at a critically low level. You can change the settings for the battery alarms in Dell QuickSet or the Power Options window (see "Configuring Power Management Settings" on page 42). Conserving Battery Power To conserve battery power on your portable computer, do any of the following:

Connect the computer to an electrical outlet when possible; battery life is largely determined by the number of times the battery is used and recharged. Configure the power management settings using Microsoft Windows Power Options to optimize your computers power usage (see "Configuring Power Management Settings" on page 42). Use the Sleep power state when you leave the computer unattended for long periods of time (see "Using the Sleep Power State" on page 43). Configuring Power Management Settings You can use Windows Power Options to configure the power management settings on your computer. To use Windows Power Options, do one of the following:

Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Power Options, and then select a power plan in the Select a power plan window. or Click the icon in the notification area, click Power Options, and then select a plan in the Select a power plan window. 42 Using a Battery Using the Sleep Power State Rather than shutting down your portable computer, use the Sleep power state to conserve power. Sleep automatically saves your work to your hard drive, and then returns you to your previous work session without restarting your computer. NOTICE: If your computer loses AC and battery power while in Sleep state, it may lose data. To enter Sleep state:

Click the Start

, click

, and then click Sleep. or Depending on how you set the power management options in the Windows Power Options, use one of the following methods:

Press the power button. Close the display. Press <Fn><Esc>. To exit Sleep state, press the power button. Charging the Battery NOTE: Charge time is longer with the computer turned on. You can leave the battery in the computer for as long as you like. The batterys internal circuitry prevents the battery from overcharging. When you connect the computer to an electrical outlet or install a battery while the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the computer checks the battery charge and temperature. If necessary, the AC adapter then charges the battery and maintains the battery charge. If the battery is hot from being used in your computer or being in a hot environment, the battery may not charge when you connect the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is too hot to start charging if the battery light flashes alternately blue and amber. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet and allow the computer and the battery to cool to room temperature, then connect the computer to an electrical outlet to continue charging the battery. For more information about resolving problems with a battery, see "Power Problems" on page 108. Using a Battery 43 Replacing the Battery CAUTION: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or explosion. Replace the battery only with a compatible battery purchased from Dell. The battery is designed to work with your Dell computer. Do not use batteries from other computers with your computer. CAUTION: Before performing these procedures, turn off the computer, disconnect the AC adapter from the electrical outlet and the computer, disconnect the modem from the wall connector and the computer, and remove any other external cables from the computer. NOTICE: You must remove all external cables from the computer to avoid possible connector damage. NOTICE: If you choose to replace the battery with the computer in Sleep state, you have up to 1 minute to complete the battery replacement before the computer shuts down and loses any unsaved data. To remove the battery:

1 2 3 4 Ensure that the computer is turned off. Turn the computer over. Slide and click the battery release latches to keep them open. Slide the battery out of the bay. 1 2 1 battery 2 battery release latches (2) To replace the battery, follow the removal procedure in reverse order. Storing a Battery Remove the battery when you store your computer for an extended period of time. A battery discharges during prolonged storage. After a long storage period, recharge the battery fully (see "Charging the Battery" on page 43) before you use it. 44 Using a Battery Using the Optional Camera If you ordered a camera when you bought your computer, the camera is integrated in the computer display. The camera and its integrated digital microphones allow you to take photos and videos and to communicate visually and verbally with other computer users. The blue camera light appears when the camera is turned on. For more information about camera features, see "Specifications" on page 153. NOTE: It is normal for the camera to feel warm to the touch when the computer is running and when the camera is in use. 1 2 3 1 digital microphones (2) 2 camera indicator 3 camera Accessing the Cameras Help File To access the cameras Video Software Help file, right-click the icon in the notification area and click Launch Webcam Center

. Click Help from the menu and select Contents

. Using the Optional Camera 45 Manually Adjusting the Camera Settings If you do not want the camera to use automatic settings, you can manually adjust the camera settings. 1 2 Right-click the icon in the notification area and click Launch Webcam Console. In the Webcam Console window:

Click the Camera tab to adjust video settings, such as contrast and brightness. Click the Effects tab to adjust audio settings, such as the volume level. For more information about camera settings and other camera-related topics, see the cameras Video Software Help file (see "Accessing the Cameras Help File" on page 45). Creating a Picture or a Video 1 2 Click the icon in the notification area and click QuickCapture. The QuickCapture window appears and the blue camera light turns on. You can now direct the camera to point at the object or person that you want to record. The QuickCapture window on the screen shows you the camera target view. To take a picture, click Take a Picture. To record a video, click Record a Video. Unless you designate a different location, the picture or video is automatically saved to the My Pictures folder on your hard drive. For more information about creating pictures or videos, see the cameras Video Software Help file (see "Accessing the Cameras Help File" on page 45). 46 Using the Optional Camera Using Multimedia Playing Media NOTICE: Do not press down on the optical drive tray when you open or close it. Keep the tray closed when you are not using the drive. NOTICE: Do not move the computer while playing media. Press the eject button on the front of the drive. Place the disc, label side up, in the center of the tray and snap the disc onto the spindle. 1 2 3 Push the tray back into the drive. Using Multimedia 47 To format media for storing or copying data, see the media software that came with your computer. NOTE: Ensure that you follow all copyright laws when copying media. A CD player includes the following basic buttons:

Play. Move backward within the current track. Pause. Move forward within the current track. Stop. Go to the previous track. Eject. Go to the next track. A DVD player includes the following basic buttons:

Stop. Restart the current chapter. Play. Fast forward. Pause. Fast reverse. Advance a single frame while in pause mode. Go to the next title or chapter. Continuously play the current title or chapter. Go to the previous title or chapter. Eject. For more information on playing media, click Help on the media player

(if available). 48 Using Multimedia Playing Media Using Dell Express Card Remote Control The Dell Express Card remote control is designed to control Dell Media Direct and Windows Vista Media Center. It can work only with specified computers. For more details, refer to the Dell Support website at support.dell.com

. To play media using Dell Express Card remote control:

1 2 3 Install a coin-cell battery into your Express Card remote control. Launch Windows Vista Media Center from Start Use the remote control buttons to play media. Programs. 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Using Multimedia 49 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 Infrared Transmitter Page Down OK/Enter/Select Arrow Down Forward Stop Reverse Arrow Left Volume Down 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 Page Up Arrow Up Arrow Right Play/Pause Skip Forward Skip Back Back 16 Mute 18 Volume Up Copying CD and DVD Media This section applies only to computers that have a DVD+/-RW drive. NOTE: Ensure that you observe all copyright laws when copying media. NOTE: The types of optical drives offered by Dell may vary by country. The following instructions explain how to make an exact copy of a CD or DVD using Roxio Creator. You can also use Roxio Creator for other purposes, such as creating music CDs from audio files stored on your computer or backing up important data. For help, open Roxio Creator, and then press

<F1>. The DVD drives installed in Dell computers do not support HD-DVD media. For a list of supported media formats, see "Using Blank CD and DVD Media"

on page 51. 50 Using Multimedia How to Copy a CD or DVD NOTE: Most commercial DVDs have copyright protection and cannot be copied using Roxio Creator Plus. Click Start All Programs Roxio Creator DE Projects Copy. Under the Copy tab, click Copy Disc. To copy the CD or DVD:

1 2 3 If you have one optical drive, insert the source disc into the drive, ensure that the settings are correct, and then click the Copy Disc button to continue. The computer reads your source disc and copies the data to a temporary folder on your computer hard drive. When prompted, insert a blank disc into the drive and click OK. If you have two optical drives, select the drive into which you have inserted your source disc and click the Copy Disc button to continue. The computer copies the data from the source disc to the blank disc. Once you have finished copying the source disc, the disc that you have created automatically ejects. Using Blank CD and DVD Media DVD-writable drives can write to both CD and DVD recording media. Use blank CD-Rs to record music or permanently store data files. After creating a CD-R, you cannot write to that CD-R again (see the Sonic documentation for more information). Use a blank CD-RW if you plan to erase, rewrite, or update information on that disc later. Blank DVD+/-R media can be used to permanently store large amounts of information. After you create a DVD+/-R, you may not be able to write to that disc again if the disc is finalized or closed during the final stage of the disc creation process. Use blank DVD+/-RW media if you plan to erase, rewrite, or update information on that disc later. CD-Writable Drives Media Type Read CD-R CD-RW Yes Yes Write Yes Yes Rewritable No Yes Using Multimedia 51 DVD-Writable Drives Media Type Read Write Rewritable CD-R CD-RW DVD+R DVD-R DVD+RW DVD-RW DVD+R DL DVD-R DL Helpful Tips Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes No No Use Microsoft Windows Explorer to drag and drop files to a CD-R or CD-RW only after you start Roxio Creator and open a Creator project. Do not burn a blank CD-R or CD-RW to its maximum capacity; for example, do not copy a 650-MB file to a blank 650-MB CD. The CD-RW drive needs 12 MB of the blank space to finalize the recording. Use CD-Rs to burn music CDs that you want to play in regular stereos. CD-RWs do not play in most home or car stereos. Music MP3 files can be played only on MP3 players or on computers that have MP3 software installed. Use a blank CD-RW to practice CD recording until you are familiar with CD recording techniques. If you make a mistake, you can erase the data on the CD-RW and try again. You can also use blank CD-RWs to test music file projects before you record the project permanently to a blank CD-R. You cannot create audio DVDs with Roxio Creator. Commercially available DVD players used in home theater systems may not support all available DVD formats. For a list of formats supported by your DVD player, see the documentation provided with your DVD player or contact the manufacturer. See the Roxio website at www.sonic.com. 52 Using Multimedia Adjusting the Volume NOTE: When the speakers are muted, you do not hear the media playing. Right-click the volume icon in the notification area. Click Open Volume Mixer. Click and drag the bar to slide it up or down to increase or decrease the volume. 1 2 3 For more information on volume control options, click Help in the Volume Mixer window. The Volume Meter displays the current volume level, including mute, on your computer. Either click the QuickSet icon in the notification area and select or deselect Disable On Screen Volume Meter

, or press the volume control buttons to enable or disable the Volume Meter on the screen. Adjusting the Picture If an error message notifies you that the current resolution and color depth are using too much memory and preventing media playback, adjust the display properties:

1 2 3 4 5 Click Start Control Panel Appearance and Personalization. Under Personalization, click Adjust screen resolution. On Display Settings, click and drag the bar to reduce the resolution setting. In the drop-down menu under Color quality, click Medium (16 bit). Click OK. Using Dell MediaDirect Dell MediaDirect is an instant-on multimedia playback mode for digital media. Press the Dell MediaDirect button, located on the hinge cover, to launch Dell MediaDirect. When your computer is turned off or in Sleep state, you can press the Dell MediaDirect button to start the computer and automatically launch the Dell MediaDirect application. Using Multimedia 53 1 1 Dell MediaDirect button NOTE: You cannot reinstall Dell MediaDirect if you voluntarily reformat the hard drive. You need the installation software to reinstall Dell MediaDirect. Contact Dell for assistance (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). For more information on using Dell MediaDirect, use the Help menu in the Dell MediaDirect application. Connecting Your Computer to a TV or Audio Device NOTE: Video and audio cables for connecting your computer to a TV or other audio device may not be included with your computer. Cables and TV/digital audio adapter cables are available for purchase from Dell. Your computer has an S-video TV-out connector that, together with a standard S-video cable, a composite video adapter cable, or a component video adapter cable (available from Dell), enable you to connect the computer to a TV. Your TV has either an S-video input connector, a composite video-input connector, or a component video-input connector. Depending on what type of connector is available on your TV, you can use a commercially available S-video cable, composite video cable, or component video cable to connect your computer to your TV. 54 Using Multimedia 1 2 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 S-video connector 1 2 3 4 5 S-video TV-out connector S/PDIF digital audio connector 2 4 composite video adapter composite video-output connector S-video connector 2 3 4 5 6 S-video TV-out connector S/PDIF digital audio connector Pb (blue) component video-output 2 4 6 component video adapter Pr (red) component video-output connector Y (green) component video-output connector connector 1 3 5 1 1 3 5 Using Multimedia 55 If you want to connect your computer to a TV or audio device, it is recommended that you connect video and audio cables to your computer in one of the following combinations:

S-video and standard audio Composite video and standard audio Component-out video and standard audio NOTE: See the diagrams at the beginning of each subsection to help you determine which method of connection you should use. When you finish connecting the video and audio cables between your computer and your TV, you must enable your computer to work with the TV. See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 68 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. Additionally, if you are using S/PDIF digital audio, see "Enabling S/PDIF Digital Audio" on page 68. S-Video and Standard Audio 1 2 1 audio connector 2 S-video TV-out connector 56 Using Multimedia 1 2 1 standard S-video cable 2 standard audio cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to connect. NOTE: If your TV or audio device supports S-video but not S/PDIF digital audio, you can connect an S-video cable directly to the S-video TV-out connector on the computer (without the TV/digital audio adapter cable). Plug one end of the S-video cable into the S-video output connector on the computer. Plug the other end of the S-video cable into the S-video input connector on your TV. Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable into the headphone connector on your computer. Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable into the audio input connectors on your TV or other audio device. Turn on the TV and any audio device that you connected (if applicable), and then turn on the computer. See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 68 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. Using Multimedia 57 S-Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio 1 2 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 composite video adapter 1 2 3 1 composite video adapter 2 S-video cable 3 S/PDIF digital audio cable 58 Using Multimedia 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or the audio device that you want to connect. Connect the composite video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on your computer. Plug one end of the S-video cable into the S-video output connector on the composite video adapter. 1 2 1 composite video adapter 2 S-video cable Plug the other end of the S-video cable into the S-video input connector on the TV. Plug one end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable into the digital audio connector on the composite video adapter cable. 1 2 1 composite video adapter 2 S/PDIF digital audio cable Plug the other end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable into the audio input connector on your TV or audio device. Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if applicable), and then turn on the computer. See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 68 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. Using Multimedia 59 Composite Video and Standard Audio 1 2 3 1 3 1 3 audio input connector 2 S-video TV-out connector composite video adapter 1 2 3 composite video adapter 2 composite video cable standard audio cable 60 Using Multimedia 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to connect. Connect the composite video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on your computer. Plug one end of the composite video cable into the composite video-

output connector on the composite video adapter. 1 2 1 composite video adapter 2 composite video cable Plug the other end of the composite video cable into the composite video-

input connector on the TV. Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable into the headphone connector on the computer. Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable into the audio input connectors on your TV or other audio device. Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if applicable), and then turn on the computer. See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 68 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. Using Multimedia 61 Composite Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio 1 2 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 composite video adapter 1 2 3 1 3 composite video adapter 2 composite video cable standard audio cable 62 Using Multimedia 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to connect. Connect the composite video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on the computer. Plug one end of the composite video cable into the composite video-input connector on the composite video adapter. 1 2 1 composite video adapter 2 composite video cable Plug the other end of the composite video cable into the composite video-

input connector on the TV. Plug one end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable into the S/PDIF audio connector on the composite video adapter. 1 2 1 composite video adapter 2 S/PDIF digital audio cable Plug the other end of the digital audio cable into the S/PDIF input connector on your TV or other audio device. Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if applicable), and then turn on the computer. See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 68 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. Using Multimedia 63 Component Video and Standard Audio 1 2 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 component video adapter 1 2 3 1 3 component video adapter 2 component video cable standard audio cable 64 Using Multimedia 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to connect. Connect the component video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on your computer. Plug all three ends of the component video cable into the component video-output connectors on the component video adapter. Make sure that the red, green, and blue colors of the cable match the corresponding adapter ports. 1 2 1 component video adapter 2 component video cable Plug all three connectors from the other end of the component video cable into the component video-input connectors on the TV. Make sure that the red, green, and blue colors of the cable match the colors of the TV input connectors. Plug the single-connector end of the audio cable into the headphone connector on the computer. Plug the two RCA connectors on the other end of the audio cable into the audio input connectors on your TV or audio device. Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if applicable), and then turn on the computer. See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 68 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. Using Multimedia 65 Component Video and S/PDIF Digital Audio 1 2 1 S-video TV-out connector 2 component video adapter 1 2 3 1 3 component video adapter 2 component video cable standard audio cable 66 Using Multimedia 1 2 3 1 3 4 5 Turn off the computer and the TV and/or audio device that you want to connect. Connect the component video adapter to the S-video TV-out connector on the computer. Plug all three ends of the component video cable into the component video-output connectors on the component video adapter. Make sure that the red, green, and blue colors of the cable match the corresponding adapter ports. 1 2 3 component video adapter 2 component video-output connectors component video cable Plug all three connectors from the other end of the component video cable into the component video-input connectors on the TV. Make sure that the red, green, and blue colors of the cable match the colors of the TV input connectors. Plug one end of the S/PDIF digital audio cable into the S/PDIF audio connector on the component video adapter. 1 2 1 component video adapter 2 S/PDIF digital audio cable Using Multimedia 67 6 7 8 Plug the other end of the digital audio cable into the S/PDIF input connector on your TV or other audio device. Turn on the TV, turn on any audio device that you connected (if applicable), and then turn on the computer. See "Enabling the Display Settings for a TV" on page 68 to ensure that the computer recognizes and works properly with the TV. Enabling S/PDIF Digital Audio 1 2 3 4 5 6 Double-click the speaker icon in the Windows notification area. Click the Options menu and then click Advanced Controls. Click Advanced. Click S/PDIF Interface. Click Close. Click OK. Enabling the Display Settings for a TV 1 2 3 4 5 NOTE: To ensure that the display options appear correctly, connect the TV to the computer before you enable the display settings. Click Start

, click Control Panel, and then click Appearance and Personalization. Under Personalization, click Adjust Screen Resolution. The Display Properties window appears. Click Advanced. Click the tab for your video card. NOTE: To determine the type of video card installed in your computer, see Windows Help and Support. To access Help and Support, click Start Help and Support. Under Pick a Task, click Use Tools to view your computer information and diagnose problems. Then, under My Computer Information, select Hardware. In the display devices section, select the appropriate option for using either a single display or multiple displays, ensuring that the display settings are correct for your selection. 68 Using Multimedia Using Cards ExpressCards ExpressCards provide additional memory, wired and wireless communications, multimedia and security features. For example, you can add an ExpressCard to make wireless wide area network (WWAN) connectivity available on your computer. ExpressCards support two form factors:

ExpressCard/34 (34 mm wide) ExpressCard/54 (54 mm wide in an L-shape with a 34 mm connector) The 34 mm card fits into both the 34 mm and 54 mm card slots. The 54 mm card only fits into a 54 mm card slot. See "Specifications" on page 153 for information on supported ExpressCards. NOTE: An ExpressCard is not a bootable device. 1 2 1 ExpressCard/34 2 ExpressCard/54 Using Cards 69 ExpressCard Blanks Your computer shipped with a plastic blank installed in the ExpressCard slot. Blanks protect unused slots from dust and other particles. Save the blank for use when no ExpressCard is installed in the slot; blanks from other computers may not fit your computer. Remove the blank before installing an ExpressCard. To remove the blank, see

"Removing an ExpressCard or Blank" on page 71. Installing an ExpressCard You can install an ExpressCard while the computer is running. The computer automatically detects the card. ExpressCards are generally marked with a symbol (such as a triangle or an arrow) or a label to indicate which end to insert into the slot. The cards are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the documentation that came with the card. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. To install an ExpressCard:

1 2 Hold the card with the top side of the card facing up. Slide the card into the slot until the card is completely seated in its connector. If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the card orientation and try again. 70 Using Cards 1 2 1 slot 2 ExpressCard The computer recognizes the ExpressCard and automatically loads the appropriate device driver. If the configuration program tells you to load the manufacturer's drivers, use the media that came with the ExpressCard. Removing an ExpressCard or Blank CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. Press the latch and remove the card or blank. For some latches, you must press the latch twice, once to pop the latch out, and then a second time to pop the card out. Save a blank to use when no ExpressCard is installed in a slot. Blanks protect unused slots from dust and other particles. Using Cards 71 1 1 release button Memory Card Reader The memory card reader provides a fast and convenient way to view and share digital photos, music, and videos stored on a memory card. NOTE: A memory card is not a bootable device. The 8-in-1 memory card reader reads the following memory cards:

Secure Digital (SD) SDIO MultiMediaCard (MMC) Memory Stick Memory Stick PRO xD-Picture Card Hi Speed-SD Hi Density-SD 72 Using Cards Memory Card Blanks Your computer shipped with a plastic blank installed in the memory card reader. Blanks protect unused slots from dust and other particles. Save the blank for use when no media memory card is installed in the slot; blanks from other computers may not fit your computer. Remove the blank before installing a media memory card. To remove the blank, see "Removing a Memory Card or Blank" on page 74. Installing a Memory Card You can install a media memory card in the computer while the computer is running. The computer automatically detects the card. Memory cards are generally marked with a symbol (such as a triangle or an arrow) or a label to indicate which end to insert into the slot. The cards are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the documentation that came with the card. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. To install a memory card:

1 2 Hold the card with the top side of the card facing up. Slide the card into the slot until the card is completely seated in its connector. If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the card orientation and try again. Using Cards 73 The computer recognizes the memory card and automatically loads the appropriate device driver. If the configuration program tells you to load the manufacturer's drivers, use the media that came with the memory card, if applicable. Removing a Memory Card or Blank CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: Use the memory card configuration utility (click the notification area) to select a card and stop it from functioning before you remove it from the computer. If you do not stop the card in the configuration utility, you could lose data. icon in the Press the card into the slot to release it from the card reader. When it is partially ejected, remove the card. 74 Using Cards Setting Up and Using Networks Setting up a computer network provides connectivity between your computer and the Internet, another computer, or a network. For example, with a network set up in a home or small office you can print to a shared printer, access drives and files on another computer, browse other networks, or access the Internet. You can set up a local area network (LAN) using a network or broadband modem cable or set up a wireless LAN (WLAN). The Windows Vista operating system provides a wizard to help guide you through the process of networking computers. For more information about and then click Networking, access Windows Help and Support (click Start Help and Support

). Connecting a Network or Broadband Modem Cable Before you connect your computer to a network, the computer must have a network adapter installed and a network cable connected to it. 1 2 Connect the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back of your computer. NOTE: Insert the cable connector until it clicks into place, and then gently pull on the cable to ensure that it is securely attached. Connect the other end of the network cable to a network connection device or a network wall connector. NOTE: Do not use a network cable with a telephone wall connector. Setting Up and Using Networks 75 Setting Up a Network 1 2 3 4 Click Start

, and then click Connect To. Click Set up a connection or network. Select an option under Choose a connection option. Click Next, and then follow the instructions in the wizard. Wireless Local Area Network A wireless local area network (WLAN) is a series of interconnected computers that communicate with each other over the air waves rather than through a network cable connected to each computer. In a WLAN, a radio communications device called an access point or wireless router connects network computers and provides Internet, or network access. The access point or wireless router and the wireless network card in the computer communicate by broadcasting data from their antennas over the air waves. What You Need to Establish a WLAN Connection Before you can set up a WLAN, you need:

High-speed (broadband) Internet access (such as cable or DSL) A broadband modem that is connected and working A wireless router or access point A wireless network card for each computer that you want to connect to your WLAN Checking Your Wireless Network Card Depending on what you selected when you purchased your computer, the computer has a variety of configurations. To confirm that your computer has a wireless network card and to determine the type of card:

Use the Device Manager Check the order confirmation for your computer 76 Setting Up and Using Networks Device Manager 1 2 3 4 5 Click Start

, and then click Control Panel. Click Classic View on the menu on the left side of the Control Panel. Double-click Device Manager. NOTE: The User Account Control window may open. Click Continue on the User Account Control window if it opens. Click the + next to Network adapters to list the utility that manages your wireless network card. If a network adapter is not listed, you may not have a wireless network card. If a network adapter is listed, you have a wireless network card. To view detailed information about the wireless network card:

1 2 Right-click the name of the network adapter. Click Properties. The Order Confirmation for Your Computer The order confirmation that you received when you ordered your computer lists the hardware and software that shipped with your computer. Setting Up a New WLAN Using a Wireless Router and a Broadband Modem 1 2 3 4 5 Contact your Internet service provider (ISP) to obtain specific information about the connection requirements for your broadband modem. Ensure that you have wired Internet access through your broadband modem before you attempt to set up a wireless Internet connection (see

"Connecting a Network or Broadband Modem Cable" on page 75). Install any software required for your wireless router. Your wireless router may have been shipped with installation media. Installation media usually contains installation and troubleshooting information. Install the required software according to the instructions provided by the router manufacturer. Shut down your computer and any other wireless-enabled computers in the vicinity through the Windows Vista Start button

. Disconnect your broadband modem power cable from the electrical outlet. Setting Up and Using Networks 77 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Disconnect the network cable from the computer and the modem. Disconnect the AC adapter cable from your wireless router to ensure that there is no power connected to the router. NOTE: Wait for a minimum of 5 minutes after disconnecting your broadband modem before continuing with the network setup. Insert a network cable into the network (RJ-45) connector on the unpowered broadband modem. Connect the other end of the network cable into the Internet network (RJ-45) connector on the unpowered wireless router. Ensure that no network or USB cables, other than the network cable connecting the modem and the wireless router, are connected to the broadband modem. NOTE: Restart your wireless equipment in the order described below to prevent a potential connection failure. Turn on only your broadband modem and wait for at least 2 minutes for the broadband modem to stabilize. After 2 minutes, proceed to step 12. Turn on your wireless router and wait for at least 2 minutes for the wireless router to stabilize. After 2 minutes, proceed to the step 13. Start your computer and wait until the boot process completes. See the documentation that came with your wireless router to do the following in order to set up the wireless router:

Establish communication between your computer and your wireless router. Configure your wireless router to communicate with your broadband router. Find out your wireless routers broadcast name. The technical term for the name of your routers broadcast name is Service Set Identifier

(SSID) or network name. If necessary, configure your wireless network card to connect to the wireless network (see "Connecting to a WLAN" on page 79). 78 Setting Up and Using Networks Connecting to a WLAN NOTE: Before you connect to a WLAN, ensure that you have followed the instructions in "Wireless Local Area Network" on page 76. NOTE: The following networking instructions do not apply to internal cards with Bluetooth wireless technology or cellular products. This section provides general procedures for connecting to a network using wireless technology. Specific network names and configuration details vary. See "Wireless Local Area Network" on page 76 for more information about how to prepare for connecting your computer to a WLAN. Your wireless network card requires specific software and drivers for connecting to a network. The software is already installed. NOTE: If the software is removed or corrupted, follow the instructions in the user documentation for your wireless network card. Verify the type of wireless network card installed in your computer and then search for that name on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. For information on the type of wireless network card that is installed in your computer, see "Checking Your Wireless Network Card" on page 76. When you turn on your computer and a network (for which your computer is not configured) is detected in the area, a pop-up appears near the network icon in the Windows notification area. To connect to the network:

1 2 3 4 Click Start

, and then click Network. Click Network and Sharing on the navigation bar at the top of the Network folder. Click Connect to a network under Tasks. Select your network from the list and click Connect. Once you have configured your computer for a wireless network, another pop-up notifies you that your computer is connected to that network. Thereafter, whenever you log on to your computer within the range of the wireless network that you selected, the same pop-up notifies you of the wireless network connection. NOTE: If you select a secure network, you must enter a WEP or WPA key when prompted. Network security settings are unique to your network. Dell cannot provide this information. NOTE: Your computer can take up to 1 minute to connect to the network. Setting Up and Using Networks 79 Monitoring the Status of the Wireless Network Card Through Dell QuickSet The wireless activity indicator provides you with an easy way to monitor the status of your computers wireless devices. To turn the wireless activity indicator on or off, click the QuickSet icon in the taskbar and select Hotkey Popups Wireless Activity Indicator Off

. If is not checked, the indicator is on. Wireless Activity Indicator Off If is checked, the indicator is off. The wireless activity indicator displays whether your computers integrated wireless devices are enabled or disabled. When you turn the wireless networking function on or off, the wireless activity indicator changes to display the status. For more information about the Dell QuickSet wireless activity indicator, right-click the QuickSet icon in the taskbar, and then select Help

. Mobile Broadband (or Wireless Wide Area Network) A Mobile Broadband network, also known as a Wireless Wide Area Network

(WWAN), is a high-speed digital cellular network that provides Internet access over a much wider geographical area than a WLAN, which typically covers only from 100 to 1000 feet. Your computer can maintain Mobile Broadband network access as long as the computer is within a cellular-data coverage zone. Contact your service provider for coverage of a high-speed digital cellular network. NOTE: Even if you are able to make a call from your cellular phone in a specific geographical location, that location may not necessarily be within a cellular-data coverage zone. What You Need to Establish a Mobile Broadband Network Connection NOTE: Depending on your computer, you can use either a Mobile Broadband ExpressCard or Mini Card, but not both, to establish a Mobile Broadband network connection. To set up a Mobile Broadband network connection, you need:

A Mobile Broadband ExpressCard or Mini Card (depending on your computers configuration) NOTE: For instructions on using ExpressCards, see "ExpressCards" on page 69. 80 Setting Up and Using Networks An activated Mobile Broadband ExpressCard or activated Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) for your service provider The Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility (already installed on your computer if you purchased the card when you purchased your computer, or on the media that accompanied your card if purchased separately from your computer) If the utility is corrupted or deleted from your computer, see the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility users guide in Windows Help and Support (click Start

, and then click Help and Support

) or on the media that accompanied your card if you purchased it separately from your computer. Checking Your Dell Mobile Broadband Card Depending on what you selected when you purchased your computer, the computer has a variety of configurations. To determine your computer configuration, see one of the following:

Your order confirmation Microsoft Windows Help and Support To check your Mobile Broadband card in Windows Help and Support:

Click Start 1 2 Help and Support Use Tools to view your computer information and diagnose problems Under Tools, click My Computer Information the hardware installed on this computer. Find information about

. On the My Computer Information - Hardware screen, you can view the type of Mobile Broadband card installed in your computer as well as other hardware components. NOTE: The Mobile Broadband card is listed under Modems. Setting Up and Using Networks 81 Connecting to a Mobile Broadband Network NOTE: These instructions only apply to Mobile Broadband ExpressCards or Mini-

Cards. They do not apply to internal cards with wireless technology. NOTE: Before you connect to the Internet, you must activate Mobile Broadband service through your cellular service provider. For instructions and for additional information about using the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, see the user's

, and then click guide available through Windows Help and Support (click Start Help and Support). The user's guide is also available on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com and on the media included with your Mobile Broadband card if you purchased the card separately from your computer. Use the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility to establish and manage a Mobile Broadband network connection to the Internet:

1 2 3 1 2 Click the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility icon in the Windows notification area to run the utility. Click Connect. NOTE: The Connect button changes to the Disconnect button. Follow the instructions on the screen to manage the network connection with the utility. or Click Start All Programs Dell Wireless. Click Dell Wireless Broadband and follow the instructions on the screen. Enabling/Disabling the Dell Mobile Broadband Card NOTE: If you are unable to connect to a Mobile Broadband network, ensure that you have all the components for establishing a Mobile Broadband connection (see

"What You Need to Establish a Mobile Broadband Network Connection" on page 80), and then verify that your Mobile Broadband card is enabled by verifying the setting of the wireless switch. You can turn your Mobile Broadband card on and off using the wireless switch on your computer. You can turn your computers wireless devices on and off with the wireless switch on the front side of the computer (see "Front View" on page 20). 82 Setting Up and Using Networks If the switch is in the on position, move the switch to the off position to disable the switch and the Mobile Broadband card. If the switch is in the off position, move the switch to the on position to enable the switch and the Dell Mobile Broadband card. For information about the wireless switch positions. To monitor the status of your wireless device, see "Monitoring the Status of the Wireless Network Card Through Dell QuickSet" on page 80. Dell Wi-Fi Catcher Network Locator The wireless switch on your Dell computer uses the Dell Wi-Fi Catcher Network Locator to scan specifically for wireless networks in your vicinity. To scan for a wireless network, slide and hold the wireless switch in the momentary position for a few seconds. The Wi-Fi Catcher Network Locator functions regardless of whether your computer is turned on or off, or in Sleep state, as long as the switch is configured through Dell QuickSet or the BIOS

(system setup program) to control WiFi network connections. Because the Wi-Fi Catcher Network Locator is disabled and not configured for use when your computer is shipped to you, you must first use Dell QuickSet to enable and configure the switch to control WiFi network connections. For more information on the Wi-Fi Catcher Network Locator and to enable the feature through Dell QuickSet, right-click the QuickSet icon in the notification area, and then select Help

. Setting Up and Using Networks 83 84 Setting Up and Using Networks Securing Your Computer Security Cable Lock NOTE: Your computer does not ship with a security cable lock. A security cable lock is a commercially available antitheft device. To use the lock, attach it to the security cable slot on your Dell computer. For more information, see the instructions included with the device. NOTICE: Before you buy an antitheft device, ensure that it will work with the security cable slot on your computer. Passwords Passwords prevent unauthorized access to your computer. When you first start your computer, you must assign a primary password at the prompt. If you do not enter a password within 2 minutes, the computer returns to its previous operating state. When using passwords, observe the following guidelines:

Choose a password that you can remember, but not one that is easy to guess. For example, do not use the names of family members or pets for passwords. It is recommended that you do not write down your password. If you do write it down, however, ensure that the password is stored in a secure location. Securing Your Computer 85 Do not share your password with other people. Ensure that people are not watching you when you type your password. NOTICE: Passwords provide a high level of security for data in your computer or hard drive. However, they are not foolproof. If you require more security, obtain and use additional forms of protection such as data encryption programs. Use the User Accounts option in the Control Panel in the Microsoft Windows operating system to create user accounts or to change passwords. Once you create a user password, you must enter it each time you turn on or unlock your computer. If you do not enter a password within 2 minutes, the computer returns to its previous operating state. For more information, see your Windows documentation. If you forget any of your passwords, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). For your protection, Dell technical support staff will ask you for proof of your identity to ensure that only an authorized person can use the computer. If Your Computer Is Lost or Stolen Call a law enforcement agency to report the lost or stolen computer. Include the Service Tag in your description of the computer. Ask that a case number be assigned and write down the number, along with the name, address, and phone number of the law enforcement agency. If possible, obtain the name of the investigating officer. NOTE: If you know where the computer was lost or stolen, call a law enforcement agency in that area. If you do not know, call a law enforcement agency where you live. If the computer belongs to a company, notify the security office of the company. Contact Dell customer service to report the missing computer. Provide the computer Service Tag, the case number, and the name, address, and phone number of the law enforcement agency to which you reported the missing computer. If possible, give the name of the investigating officer. The Dell customer service representative will log your report under the computer Service Tag and record the computer as missing or stolen. If someone calls Dell for technical assistance and gives your Service Tag, the computer is identified automatically as missing or stolen. The representative will attempt to get the phone number and address of the caller. Dell will then contact the law enforcement agency to which you reported the missing computer. 86 Securing Your Computer Troubleshooting Dell Technical Update Service The Dell Technical Update service provides proactive e-mail notification of software and hardware updates for your computer. The service is free and can be customized for content, format, and how frequently you receive notifications. To enroll for the Dell Technical Update service, go to support.dell.com/technicalupdate

. Dell Diagnostics CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. When to Use the Dell Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in

"Lockups and Software Problems" on page 103 and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical assistance. It is recommended that you print these procedures before you begin. NOTE: The Dell Diagnostics only operate on Dell computers. Enter system setup, review your computers configuration information, and ensure that the device you want to test displays in system setup and is active

(see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 161). Start the Dell Diagnostics from your hard drive or from your Drivers and Utilities media (see "Drivers and Utilities Media" on page 13). Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive The Dell Diagnostics is located on a hidden diagnostic utility partition on your hard drive. NOTE: If your computer cannot display a screen image, contact Dell (see

"Contacting Dell" on page 152). Troubleshooting 87 1 2 3 4 Ensure that the computer is connected to an electrical outlet that is known to be working properly. Turn on (or restart) your computer. Start the Dell Diagnostics in one of the following two ways:

a When the DELL logo appears, press <F12> immediately. Select Diagnostics from the boot menu, and then press <Enter>. NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop, then shut down your computer and try again. NOTE: Before attempting option B, the computer must be powered down completely. b Press and hold the <Fn> key while powering the computer on. NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from your Drivers and Utilities media. The computer runs the Pre-boot System Assessment, a series of initial tests of your system board, keyboard, hard drive, and display. During the assessment, answer any questions that appear. If a failure is detected, the computer stops and beeps. To stop the assessment and restart the computer, press <n>; to continue to the next test, press <y>; to retest the component that failed, press <r>. If failures are detected during the Pre-boot System Assessment, write down the error code(s) and contact Dell. If the Pre-boot System Assessment completes successfully, you receive the message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue. Press any key to start the Dell Diagnostics from the diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive. Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Drivers and Utilities Media 1 2 3 Insert your Drivers and Utilities media. Shut down and restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press <F12> immediately. 88 Troubleshooting NOTE: Keyboard failure may result when a key on the keyboard is held down for extended periods of time. To avoid possible keyboard failure, press and release <F12> in even intervals until the boot device menu appears. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 At the boot device menu, use the up- and down-arrow keys to highlight CD/DVD/CD-RW, and then press <Enter>. NOTE: The Quickboot feature changes the boot sequence for the current boot only. Upon restart, the computer boots according to the boot sequence specified in system setup. Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears, and then press <Enter>. Type 1 to start the Drivers and Utilities menu, and then press <Enter>. Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer. At the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu, select the test you want to run. NOTE: Write down any error codes and problem descriptions exactly as they appear and follow the instructions on the screen. After all tests have completed, close the test window to return to the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu. Remove your Drivers and Utilities media, then close the Main Menu window to exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer. Dell Diagnostics Main Menu After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. NOTE: It is recommended that you select Test System to run a complete test on your computer. Option Function Test Memory Run the stand-alone memory test Test System Run System Diagnostics Exit Exit the Diagnostics Troubleshooting 89 After you have selected the Test System option from the main menu, the following menu appears. NOTE: It is recommended that you select Extended Test from the menu below to run a more thorough check of the devices in the computer. Option Function Express Test Extended Test Custom Test Symptom Tree Performs a quick test of system devices. The test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Performs a thorough check of system devices. The test typically takes an hour or more and periodically requires your input to answer specific questions. Tests a specific device in the system and can be used to customize the tests you want to run. Lists a number of common symptoms and allows you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you are having. For any problem encountered during a test, a message appears with an error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description exactly as it appears and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the problem, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell"

on page 152). NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen. When contacting Dell support, have your Service Tag ready. The following tabs provide additional information for tests run from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option:

90 Troubleshooting Tab Results Errors Help Function Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the problem description. Describes the test and any requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests, and it displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings. Dell Support Utility The Dell Support Utility is customized for your computing environment. This utility provides self-support information, software updates, and health scans for your computer. Use this utility to do the following:

Check your computing environment View the Dell Support Utility settings Access the help file for the Dell Support Utility View frequently asked questions Learn more about the Dell Support Utility Turn the Dell Support Utility off Troubleshooting 91 For more information about the Dell Support Utility, click the question mark (

)

?

at the top of the Dell Support window. To access the Dell Support Utility:

Click the Dell Support icon in the notification area. icon functions vary when clicking, double-clicking, or NOTE: The right-clicking. Or Click the Start All Programs Dell Support Dell Support Settings. Ensure that the Show icon on the taskbar option is checked. NOTE: If the Dell Support Utility is not available from the Start menu, go to support.dell.com and download the software. Drive Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 151 as you complete these checks. E N S U R E T H A T M I C R O S O F T Click Start Computer. W I N D O W S R E C O G N I Z E S T H E D R I V E If the drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. TE S T T H E D R I V E Insert another floppy disk, CD, or DVD to eliminate the possibility that the original media is defective. Insert a bootable floppy disk and restart the computer. C L E A N T H E D R I V E O R D I S K See "Cleaning Your Computer" on page 164. E N S U R E T H A T T H E C D O R D V D M E D I A I S S N A P P E D O N T O T H E S P I N D L E C H E C K T H E C A B L E C O N N E C T I O N S C H E C K F O R H A R D W A R E I N C O M P A T I B I L I T I E S See "Troubleshooting Software and Hardware Problems" on page 118. R U N T H E D E L L D I A G N O S T I C S See "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87. 92 Troubleshooting Optical drive problems NOTE: High-speed optical drive vibration is normal and may cause noise, which does not indicate a defect in the drive or the media. NOTE: Because of different regions worldwide and different disc formats, not all DVD titles work in all DVD drives. Problems writing to a CD-RW or DVD+/-RW drive C L O S E O T H E R P R O G R A M S CD-RW and DVD+/-RW drives must receive a steady stream of data when writing. If the stream is interrupted, an error occurs. Try closing all programs before you write to the drive. TU R N O F F S L E E P S T A T E I N W I N D O W S B E F O R E W R I T I N G T O A C D / D V D D I S C See "Using the Sleep Power State" on page 43 for information on Sleep state. C H A N G E T H E W R I T E S P E E D T O A S L O W E R R A T E See the help files for your CD or DVD creation software. The drive tray cannot eject 1 2 3 Ensure that the computer is shut down. Straighten a paper clip and insert one end into the eject hole at the front of the drive, then push firmly until the tray is partially ejected. Gently pull out the tray until it stops. The drive makes an unfamiliar scraping or grinding sound Ensure that the sound is not caused by the program that is running. Ensure that the disc is inserted properly. Troubleshooting 93 Hard drive problems A L L O W T H E C O M P U T E R T O C O O L B E F O R E T U R N I N G I T O N A hot hard drive may prevent the operating system from starting. Try allowing the computer to return to room temperature before turning it on. R U N C H E C K D I S K 1 2 3 4 Click Start Computer. Right-click Local Disk (C:). Click Properties Tools Check Now. NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action. Click to check Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors, and then click Start. E-Mail and Internet Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: Connect the modem to an analog telephone jack only. The modem does not operate while it is connected to a digital telephone network. C H E C K T H E M I C R O S O F T O U T L O O K E X P R E S S S E C U R I T Y S E T T I N G S If you cannot open your e-mail attachments:

1 2 In Outlook Express, click Tools, click Options, and then click Security. Click Do not allow attachments to remove the checkmark. C H E C K T H E T E L E P H O N E L I N E C O N N E C T I O N C H E C K T H E T E L E P H O N E J A C K C O N N E C T T H E M O D E M D I R E C T L Y T O T H E T E L E P H O N E W A L L J A C K U S E A D I F F E R E N T T E L E P H O N E L I N E Verify that the telephone line is connected to the jack on the modem (the jack has either a green label or a connector-shaped icon next to it). Ensure that you hear a click when you insert the telephone line connector into the modem. 94 Troubleshooting Disconnect the telephone line from the modem and connect it to a telephone, then listen for a dial tone. If you have other telephone devices sharing the line, such as an answering machine, fax machine, surge protector, or line splitter, then bypass them and connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack. If you are using a line that is 3 m (10 ft) or more in length, try a shorter one. E N S U R E T H A T Y O U A R E C O N N E C T E D T O T H E I N T E R N E T Ensure that you have subscribed to an Internet service provider. With the Outlook Express e-mail program open, click File

. If Work Offline has a checkmark next to it, click the checkmark to remove it, and then connect to the Internet. For help, contact your Internet service provider. S C A N T H E C O M P U T E R F O R S P Y W A R E If you are experiencing slow computer performance, you frequently receive pop-up advertisements, or you are having problems connecting to the Internet, your computer might be infected with spyware. Use an anti-virus program that includes anti-spyware protection

(your program may require an upgrade) to scan the computer and remove spyware. For more information, go to support.dell.com and search for the keyword spyware

. Troubleshooting 95 Error Messages Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 151 as you complete these checks. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. If the message is not listed, see the documentation for the operating system or the program that was running when the message appeared. A U X I L I A R Y D E V I C E F A I L U R E The touch pad or external mouse may be faulty. For an external mouse, check the cable connection. Enable the Pointing Device option in the system setup program (see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 161). If the problem persists, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). B A D C O M M A N D O R F I L E N A M E Ensure that you have spelled the command correctly, put spaces in the proper place, and used the correct pathname. C A C H E D I S A B L E D D U E T O F A I L U R E The primary cache internal to the microprocessor has failed. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). C D D R I V E C O N T R O L L E R F A I L U R E The CD drive does not respond to commands from the computer (see "Drive Problems" on page 92). D A T A E R R O R The hard drive cannot read the data (see "Drive Problems" on page 92). D E C R E A S I N G A V A I L A B L E M E M O R Y One or more memory modules may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 128). D I S K C : F A I L E D I N I T I A L I Z A T I O N The hard drive failed initialization. Run the hard drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). D R I V E N O T R E A D Y The operation requires a hard drive in the bay before it can continue. Install a hard drive in the hard drive bay (see "Hard Drive" on page 125). E R R O R R E A D I N G P C M C I A C A R D The computer cannot identify the ExpressCard. Reinsert the card or try another card (see "ExpressCards" on page 69). E X T E N D E D M E M O R Y S I Z E H A S C H A N G E D The amount of memory recorded in NVRAM does not match the memory installed in the computer. Restart the computer. If the error appears again, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). 96 Troubleshooting T H E F I L E B E I N G C O P I E D I S T O O L A R G E F O R T H E D E S T I N A T I O N D R I V E The file that you are trying to copy is too large to fit on the disk, or the disk is full. Try copying the file to a different disk or use a larger capacity disk. A F I L E N A M E C A N N O T C O N T A I N A N Y O F T H E F O L L O W I N G C H A R A C T E R S: \ / : * ? <

> | Do not use these characters in filenames. G A T E A20 F A I L U R E A memory module may be loose. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 128). G E N E R A L F A I L U R E The operating system is unable to carry out the command. The message is usually followed by specific informationfor example, Printer out of paper. H A R D - D I S K D R I V E C O N F I G U R A T I O N E R R O R The computer cannot identify the Take the appropriate action. drive type. Shut down the computer, remove the hard drive (see "Hard Drive"

on page 125), and boot the computer from a CD. Then, shut down the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. Run the Hard Disk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). H A R D - D I S K D R I V E C O N T R O L L E R F A I L U R E 0 The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Shut down the computer, remove the hard drive (see "Hard Drive" on page 125), and boot the computer from a CD. Then, shut down the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard Disk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). H A R D - D I S K D R I V E F A I L U R E The hard drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Shut down the computer, remove the hard drive (see

"Hard Drive" on page 125), and boot the computer from a CD. Then, shut down the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard Disk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). H A R D - D I S K D R I V E R E A D F A I L U R E The hard drive may be defective. Shut down the computer, remove the hard drive (see "Hard Drive" on page 125), and boot the computer from a CD. Then, shut down the computer, reinstall the hard drive, and restart the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Run the Hard Disk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). I N S E R T B O O T A B L E M E D I A The operating system is trying to boot to nonbootable media, such as a floppy disk or CD. Insert bootable media. I N V A L I D C O N F I G U R A T I O N I N F O R M A T I O N- P L E A S E R U N S YS T E M S E T U P Troubleshooting 97 P R O G R A M The system configuration information does not match the hardware configuration. The message is most likely to occur after a memory module is installed. Correct the appropriate options in the system setup program (see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 161). K E Y B O A R D C L O C K L I N E F A I L U R E For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics (see

"Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). K E Y B O A R D C O N T R O L L E R F A I L U R E For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or the mouse during the boot routine. Run the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). K E Y B O A R D D A T A L I N E F A I L U R E For external keyboards, check the cable connection. Run the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics (see

"Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). K E Y B O A R D S T U C K K E Y F A I L U R E For external keyboards or keypads, check the cable connection. Restart the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or keys during the boot routine. Run the Stuck Key test in the Dell Diagnostics

(see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). L I C E N S E D C O N T E N T I S N O T A C C E S S I B L E I N M E D I A D I R E C T Dell MediaDirect cannot verify the Digital Rights Management (DRM) restrictions on the file, so the file cannot be played (see "Dell MediaDirect problems" on page 104). M E M O R Y A D D R E S S L I N E F A I L U R E A T A D D R E S S , R E A D V A L U E E X P E C T I N G V A L U E A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 128). M E M O R Y A L L O C A T I O N E R R O R The software you are attempting to run is conflicting with the operating system, another program, or a utility. Shut down the computer, wait 30 seconds, and then restart it. Try to run the program again. If the error message still appears, see the software documentation. M E M O R Y D A T A L I N E F A I L U R E A T A D D R E S S, R E A D V A L U E E X P E C T I N G V A L U E A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 128). M E M O R Y D O U B L E W O R D L O G I C F A I L U R E A T A D D R E S S, R E A D V A L U E E X P E C T I N G V A L U E A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 128). M E M O R Y O D D/ E V E N L O G I C F A I L U R E A T A D D R E S S, R E A D V A L U E E X P E C T I N G 98 Troubleshooting V A L U E A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 128). M E M O R Y W R I T E / R E A D F A I L U R E A T A D D R E S S , R E A D V A L U E E X P E C T I N G V A L U E A memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reinstall the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them (see "Memory" on page 128). N O B O O T D E V I C E A V A I L A B L E The computer cannot find the hard drive. If the hard drive is your boot device, ensure that the drive is installed, properly seated, and partitioned as a boot device. N O B O O T S E C T O R O N H A R D D R I V E The operating system may be corrupted. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). N O T I M E R T I C K I N T E R R U P T A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). N O T E N O U G H M E M O R Y O R R E S O U R C E S. E X I T S O M E P R O G R A M S A N D T R Y A G A I N You have too many programs open. Close all windows and open the program that you want to use. O P E R A T I N G S YS T E M N O T F O U N D Reinstall the hard drive (see "Hard Drive"

on page 125). If the problem persists, contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). O P T I O N A L R O M B A D C H E C K S U M The optional ROM has failed. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). A R E Q U I R E D .DL L F I L E W A S N O T F O U N D The program that you are trying to open is missing an essential file. Remove and then reinstall the program. 1 2 3 4 5 Click Start Control Panel. Under Programs, click Uninstall a Program. Select the program you want to remove. Click Uninstall and follow the prompts on the screen. See the program documentation for installation instructions. S E C T O R N O T F O U N D The operating system cannot locate a sector on the hard drive. You may have a defective sector or corrupted FAT on the hard drive. Run the Windows error-checking utility to check the file structure on the hard drive. See Windows Help and Support for instructions Help and Support

(click Start

). If a large number of sectors are defective, back up the data (if possible), and then reformat the hard drive. Troubleshooting 99 S E E K E R R O R The operating system cannot find a specific track on the hard drive. S H U T D O W N F A I L U R E A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). TI M E- O F - D A Y C L O C K L O S T P O W E R System configuration settings are corrupted. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, try to restore the data by entering the system setup program, then immediately exit the program (see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 161). If the message reappears, contact Dell (see

"Contacting Dell" on page 152). TI M E- O F - D A Y C L O C K S T O P P E D The reserve battery that supports the system configuration settings may require recharging. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, contact Dell

(see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). TI M E- O F - D A Y N O T S E T - P L E A S E R U N T H E S YS T E M S E T U P P R O G R A M The time or date stored in the system setup program does not match the system clock. Correct the settings for the Date Time and options (see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 161). TI M E R C H I P C O U N T E R 2 F A I L E D A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). U N E X P E C T E D I N T E R R U P T I N P R O T E C T E D M O D E The keyboard controller may be malfunctioning, or a memory module may be loose. Run the System Memory tests and the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics (see

"Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). X : \ I S N O T A C C E S S I B L E . T H E D E V I C E I S N O T R E A D Y Insert a disk into the drive and try again. W A R N I N G: B A T T E R Y I S C R I T I C A L L Y L O W The battery is running out of charge. Replace the battery, or connect the computer to an electrical outlet;

otherwise, activate hibernate mode or shut down the computer. 100 Troubleshooting ExpressCard Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. C H E C K T H E E X P R E S S C A R D Ensure that the ExpressCard is properly inserted into the connector. C H E C K T H A T T H E C A R D I S R E C O G N I Z E D B Y W I N D O W S Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the Windows taskbar. Some cards do not support this feature. If the card supports this Windows feature, the card will be listed. I F Y O U H A V E P R O B L E M S W I T H A D E L L- P R O V I D E D E X P R E S SC A R D Contact Dell

(see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). Also, for Mobile Broadband (WWAN) ExpressCards, see "Mobile Broadband (Wireless Wide Area Network

[WWAN])" on page 107. I F Y O U H A V E P R O B L E M S W I T H A N E X P R E S S C A R D N O T P R O V I D E D B Y D E L L Contact the ExpressCard manufacturer. IEEE 1394 Device Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. E N S U R E T H A T T H E IEEE 1394 D E V I C E I S R E C O G N I Z E D B Y W I N D O W S 1 Control Panel System and Maintenance Click Start Device Manager. NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action. If your IEEE 1394 device is listed, Windows recognizes the device. I F Y O U H A V E P R O B L E M S W I T H A D E L L- P R O V I D E D IEEE 1394 D E V I C E Contact Dell or the IEEE 1394 device manufacturer (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). I F Y O U H A V E P R O B L E M S W I T H A N IEEE 1394 D E V I C E N O T P R O V I D E D B Y D E L L Contact Dell or the IEEE 1394 device manufacturer (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). Ensure that the IEEE 1394 device is properly inserted into the connector Troubleshooting 101 Keyboard Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 151 as you perform the various checks. NOTE: Use the integrated keyboard when running the Dell Diagnostics or the system setup program. When you attach an external keyboard, the integrated keyboard remains fully functional. External Keyboard problems NOTE: When you attach an external keyboard, the integrated keyboard remains fully functional. C H E C K T H E K E Y B O A R D C A B L E Shut down the computer, disconnect the keyboard cable and check it for damage, then firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a keyboard extension cable, disconnect it and connect the keyboard directly to the computer. C H E C K T H E E X T E R N A L K E Y B O A R D 1 2 3 4 Shut down the computer, wait 1 minute, and then turn it on again. Verify that the numbers, capitals, and scroll lock lights on the keyboard blink during the boot routine. From the Windows desktop, click Start Accessories Notepad. All Programs Type some characters on the external keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If you cannot verify these steps, you may have a defective external keyboard. TO V E R I F Y T H A T T H E P R O B L E M I S W I T H T H E E X T E R N A L K E Y B O A R D, C H E C K T H E I N T E G R A T E D K E Y B O A R D 1 2 3 Shut down the computer. Disconnect the external keyboard. Turn on the computer. 102 Troubleshooting 4 5 From the Windows desktop, click Start Accessories Notepad. All Programs Type some characters on the internal keyboard and verify that they appear on the display. If the characters appear now, but did not with the external keyboard, you may have a defective external keyboard. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). R U N T H E K E Y B O A R D D I A G N O S T I C S T E S T S Run the PC-AT Compatible Keyboards tests in the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). If the tests indicate a defective external keyboard, contact Dell (see

"Contacting Dell" on page 152). Unexpected characters D I S A B L E T H E N U M E R I C K E Y P A D Press <Num Lk> to disable the numeric keypad if numbers are displayed instead of letters. Verify that the numbers lock light is not lit. Lockups and Software Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. The computer does not start C H E C K T H E A C A D A P T E R Ensure that the AC adapter is firmly connected to the computer and to the electrical outlet. The AC adapter shuts down when there is a fault. The green light turns off when this happens. To bring it back on, disconnect the AC adapter from the power source for 10 seconds, and then connect it back on. The computer stops responding NOTICE: You might lose data if you are unable to perform an operating system shutdown. TU R N T H E C O M P U T E R O F F If you are unable to get a response by pressing a key on your keyboard or moving your mouse, press and hold the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off, then restart your computer. Troubleshooting 103 A program stops responding or crashes repeatedly E N D T H E P R O G R A M 1 2 3 Press <Crtl><Shift><Esc> simultaneously. Click the Applications tab and select the program that is no longer responding. Click End Task. NOTE: The chkdsk program may run when you restart the computer. Follow the instructions on the screen. C H E C K T H E S O F T W A R E D O C U M E N T A T I O N If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program. Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on a floppy disk or CD. A program is designed for an earlier Microsoft Windows operating system R U N T H E P R O G R A M C O M P A T I B I L I T Y W I Z A R D Program compatibility is a mode in Windows that lets you run programs written for earlier versions of Windows. For more information, search for the keyword program compatibility wizard in Windows Help and Support. A solid blue screen appears TU R N T H E C O M P U T E R O F F If you are unable to get a response by pressing a key on your keyboard or moving your mouse, press and hold the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off, then restart your computer. Dell MediaDirect problems C H E C K T H E D E L L M E D I A D I R E C T H E L P F I L E F O R I N F O R M A T I O N Use the Help menu to access Dell MediaDirect Help. TO P L A Y M O V I E S W I T H D E L L M E D I A D I R E C T , Y O U M U S T H A V E A D V D D R I V E A N D T H E D E L L D V D P L A Y E R If you purchased a DVD drive with your computer, this software should already be installed. V I D E O Q U A L I T Y P R O B L E M S Turn off the Use Hardware Acceleration option. This feature takes advantage of the special processing in some graphics cards to reduce processor requirements when playing DVDs and certain types of video files. 104 Troubleshooting C A N N O T P L A Y S O M E M E D I A F I L E S Because Dell MediaDirect provides access to media files outside the Windows operating system environment, access to licensed content is restricted. Licensed content is digital content that has Digital Rights Management (DRM) applied to it. The Dell MediaDirect environment cannot verify the DRM restrictions, so the licensed files cannot be played. Licensed music and video files have a lock icon next to them. You can access licensed files in the Windows operating system environment. A D J U S T I N G T H E C O L O R S E T T I N G S F O R M O V I E S T H A T C O N T A I N S C E N E S T H A T A R E T O O D A R K O R T O O B R I G H T Click to use a video enhancement EagleVision technology that detects video content and dynamically adjusts the brightness/contrast/saturation ratios. NOTICE: You cannot reinstall the Dell MediaDirect feature if you voluntarily reformat the hard drive. Contact Dell for assistance (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). Other software problems C H E C K T H E S O F T W A R E D O C U M E N T A T I O N O R C O N T A C T T H E S O F T W A R E M A N U F A C T U R E R F O R T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G I N F O R M A T I O N Ensure that the program is compatible with the operating system installed on your computer. Ensure that your computer meets the minimum hardware requirements needed to run the software. See the software documentation for information. Ensure that the program is installed and configured properly. Verify that the device drivers do not conflict with the program. If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program. B A C K U P Y O U R F I L E S I M M E D I A T E L Y U S E A V I R U S- S C A N N I N G P R O G R A M T O C H E C K T H E H A R D D R I V E, F L O P P Y D I S K S, O R CD S S A V E A N D C L O S E A N Y O P E N F I L E S O R P R O G R A M S A N D S H U T D O W N Y O U R C O M P U T E R T H R O U G H T H E S T A R T M E N U Troubleshooting 105 S C A N T H E C O M P U T E R F O R S P Y W A R E If you are experiencing slow computer performance, you frequently receive pop-up advertisements, or you are having problems connecting to the Internet, your computer might be infected with spyware. Use an anti-virus program that includes anti-spyware protection

(your program may require an upgrade) to scan the computer and remove spyware. For more information, go to support.dell.com and search for the keyword spyware

. R U N T H E D E L L D I A G N O S T I C S If all tests run successfully, the error condition is related to a software problem (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). Memory Problems Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 151 as you complete these checks. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. I F Y O U R E C E I V E A N I N S U F F I C I E N T M E M O R Y M E S S A G E Save and close any open files and exit any open programs you are not using to see if that resolves the problem. See the software documentation for minimum memory requirements. If necessary, install additional memory (see "Memory" on page 128). Reseat the memory modules to ensure that your computer is successfully communicating with the memory (see "Memory" on page 128). Run the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). I F Y O U E X P E R I E N C E O T H E R M E M O R Y P R O B L E M S Reseat the memory modules to ensure that your computer is successfully communicating with the memory (see "Memory" on page 128). Ensure that you are following the memory installation guidelines (see

"Memory" on page 128). Run the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). 106 Troubleshooting Network Problems Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 151 as you complete these checks. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. C H E C K T H E N E T W O R K C A B L E C O N N E C T O R Ensure that the network cable is firmly inserted into both the network connector on the back of the computer and the network jack. C H E C K T H E N E T W O R K L I G H T S O N T H E N E T W O R K C O N N E C T O R No light indicates that no network communication exists. Replace the network cable. R E S T A R T T H E C O M P U T E R A N D L O G O N T O T H E N E T W O R K A G A I N C H E C K Y O U R N E T W O R K S E T T I N G S Contact your network administrator or the person who set up your network to verify that your network settings are correct and that the network is functioning. Mobile Broadband (Wireless Wide Area Network [WWAN]) NOTE: The Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility users guide and the Mobile Broadband ExpressCard users guide are available through Windows Help and Help and Support). You can also download the Dell Support (click Start Mobile Broadband Card Utility users guide from support.dell.com. NOTE: The WWAN device installed. Double-click the icon to launch the utility. icon appears in the notification area if the computer has a Dell A C T I V A T E T H E M O B I L E B R O A D B A N D E X P R E S S C A R D You must activate the Mobile Broadband ExpressCard before you can connect to the network. Position the mouse over the icon in the notification area to verify the status of the connection. If the card is not activated, follow the card activation instructions located within the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility. To access the utility, double-click the icon located in the taskbar, at the lower-right corner of your screen. If your ExpressCard is not a Dell-

branded card, see the manufacturers instructions for your card. Troubleshooting 107 C H E C K N E T W O R K C O N N E C T I O N S T A T U S I N T H E D E L L M O B I L E B R O A D B A N D C A R D U T I L I T Y Double-click the icon to launch the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility. Check the status in the main window:

No card detected Restart the computer, and launch the Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility again. Check your WWAN service Contact your cellular service provider to verify your plan coverage and supported services. Power Problems Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 151 as you complete these checks. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. C H E C K T H E P O W E R L I G H T When the power light is lit or blinking, the computer has power. If the power light is blinking, the computer is in Sleep statepress the power button to exit Sleep state. If the light is off, press the power button to turn on the computer. NOTE: For information on Sleep power state, see "Using the Sleep Power State" on page 43. C H A R G E T H E B A T T E R Y The battery charge may be depleted. 1 2 3 Reinstall the battery. Use the AC adapter to connect the computer to an electrical outlet. Turn on the computer. NOTE: Battery operating time (the time the battery can hold a charge) decreases over time. Depending on how often the battery is used and the conditions under which it is used, you may need to purchase a new battery during the life of your computer. C H E C K T H E B A T T E R Y S T A T U S L I G H T If the battery status light flashes amber or is a steady amber, the battery charge is low or depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. If the battery status light flashes blue and amber, the battery is too hot to charge. Shut down the computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet, and then let the battery and computer cool to room temperature. 108 Troubleshooting If the battery status light rapidly flashes amber, the battery may be defective. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). C H E C K T H E B A T T E R Y T E M P E R A T U R E If the battery temperature is below 0C

(32F), the computer will not start. TE S T T H E E L E C T R I C A L O U T L E T Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. C H E C K T H E A C A D A P T E R Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. C O N N E C T T H E C O M P U T E R D I R E C T L Y T O A N E L E C T R I C A L O U T L E T Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and extension cables to verify that the computer turns on. E L I M I N A T E P O S S I B L E I N T E R F E R E N C E Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. A D J U S T T H E P O W E R P R O P E R T I E S See "Configuring Power Management Settings" on page 42. R E S E A T T H E M E M O R Y M O D U L E S If the computer power light turns on, but the display remains blank, reinstall the memory modules (see "Memory" on page 128). Printer Problems Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 151 as you complete these checks. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: If you need technical assistance for your printer, contact the printers manufacturer. C H E C K T H E P R I N T E R D O C U M E N T A T I O N See the printer documentation for setup and troubleshooting information. E N S U R E T H A T T H E P R I N T E R I S T U R N E D O N C H E C K T H E P R I N T E R C A B L E C O N N E C T I O N S See the printer documentation for cable connection information. Ensure that the printer cables are securely connected to the printer and the computer. Troubleshooting 109 TE S T T H E E L E C T R I C A L O U T L E T Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. V E R I F Y T H A T T H E P R I N T E R I S R E C O G N I Z E D B Y W I N D O W S 1 2 3 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers. Right-click the printer icon. Click Properties, and then click the Ports tab. For a parallel printer, ensure that the Print to the following port(s): setting is LPT1 (Printer Port). For a USB printer, ensure that the Print to the following port(s): setting is USB. R E I N S T A L L T H E P R I N T E R D R I V E R See the printer documentation for instructions. Scanner Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: If you need technical assistance for your scanner, contact the scanners manufacturer. C H E C K T H E S C A N N E R D O C U M E N T A T I O N See the scanner documentation for setup and troubleshooting information. U N L O C K T H E S C A N N E R Ensure that your scanner is unlocked. R E S T A R T T H E C O M P U T E R A N D T R Y T H E S C A N N E R A G A I N C H E C K T H E C A B L E C O N N E C T I O N S See the scanner documentation for cable connection information. Ensure that the scanner cables are securely connected to the scanner and the computer. V E R I F Y T H A T T H E S C A N N E R I S R E C O G N I Z E D B Y M I C R O S O F T W I N D O W S Start Control PanelHardware and SoundScanners and Click Cameras

. If your scanner is listed, Windows recognizes the scanner. R E I N S T A L L T H E S C A N N E R D R I V E R See the scanner documentation for instructions. 110 Troubleshooting Sound and Speaker Problems Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 151 as you complete these checks. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. No sound from integrated speakers A D J U S T T H E W I N D O W S V O L U M E C O N T R O L Double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Adjust the volume, bass, or treble controls to eliminate distortion. A D J U S T T H E V O L U M E U S I N G K E Y B O A R D S H O R T C U T S Press <Fn><End> to disable (mute) or re-enable the integrated speakers. R E I N S T A L L T H E S O U N D ( A U D I O ) D R I V E R See "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 116. No sound from external speakers E N S U R E T H A T T H E S U B W O O F E R A N D T H E S P E A K E R S A R E T U R N E D O N See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. If your speakers have volume controls, adjust the volume, bass, or treble to eliminate distortion. A D J U S T T H E W I N D O W S V O L U M E C O N T R O L Click or double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. D I S C O N N E C T H E A D P H O N E S F R O M T H E H E A D P H O N E C O N N E C T O R Sound from the speakers is automatically disabled when headphones are connected to the headphone connector. TE S T T H E E L E C T R I C A L O U T L E T Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. E L I M I N A T E P O S S I B L E I N T E R F E R E N C E Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, or halogen lamps to check for interference. R E I N S T A L L T H E A U D I O D R I V E R See "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 116. R U N T H E D E L L D I A G N O S T I C S See "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87. NOTE: The volume control in some MP3 players overrides the Windows volume setting. If you have been listening to MP3 songs, ensure that you did not turn the player volume down or off. Troubleshooting 111 No sound from headphones C H E C K T H E H E A D P H O N E C A B L E C O N N E C T I O N Ensure that the headphone cable is securely inserted into the headphone connector. A D J U S T T H E W I N D O W S V O L U M E C O N T R O L Click or double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. Remote Control Problems A P P L I C A T I O N D O E S N O T R E S P O N D T O R E M O T E C O N T R O L W I T H I N T H E S P E C I F I E D M A X I M U M R A N G E Check that the battery is placed correctly with the "+" side facing up. Check that the battery is also not weak. Point your remote control to the receiver. The receiver is underneath the touch pad of your computer. Move the remote control closer to your computer. R E M O T E C O N T R O L I S S T U C K I N T H E S L O T Check that you have not incorrectly stored the remote control into a non-

Express Card slot. Contact Dell Technical Support for removing it. Touch Pad or Mouse Problems C H E C K T H E T O U C H P A D S E T T I N G S 1 2 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Mouse. Adjust the settings, as needed. C H E C K T H E M O U S E C A B L E Shut down the computer, disconnect the mouse cable and check it for damage, then firmly reconnect the cable. If you are using a mouse extension cable, disconnect it and connect the mouse directly to the computer. TO V E R I F Y T H A T T H E P R O B L E M I S W I T H T H E M O U S E, C H E C K T H E T O U C H P A D 1 2 Shut down the computer. Disconnect the mouse. 112 Troubleshooting 3 4 Turn on the computer. At the Windows desktop, use the touch pad to move the cursor around, select an icon, and open it. If the touch pad operates correctly, the mouse may be defective. C H E C K T H E S YS T E M S E T U P P R O G R A M S E T T I N G S Verify that the system setup program lists the correct device for the pointing device option (the computer automatically recognizes a USB mouse without making any setting adjustments). TE S T T H E M O U S E C O N T R O L L E R To test the mouse controller (which affects pointer movement) and the operation of the touch pad or mouse buttons, run the Mouse test in the Pointing Devices test group in the "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87. R E I N S T A L L T H E T O U C H P A D D R I V E R See "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities"

on page 116. Video and Display Problems Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 151 as you complete these checks. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. If the display is blank NOTE: If you are using a program that requires a higher resolution than your computer supports, it is recommended that you attach an external monitor to your computer. C H E C K T H E B A T T E R Y If you are using a battery to power your computer, the battery charge may be depleted. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet using the AC adapter, and then turn on the computer. TE S T T H E E L E C T R I C A L O U T L E T Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. C H E C K T H E A C A D A P T E R Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light is on. C O N N E C T T H E C O M P U T E R D I R E C T L Y T O A N E L E C T R I C A L O U T L E T Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and extension cables to verify that the computer turns on. Troubleshooting 113 A D J U S T T H E P O W E R P R O P E R T I E S Search for the keyword sleep in Windows Help and Support. S W I T C H T H E V I D E O I M A G E If your computer is attached to an external monitor, press <Fn><F8> to switch the video image to the display. If the display is difficult to read A D J U S T T H E B R I G H T N E S S Press <Fn> and the up- or down-arrow key. M O V E T H E E X T E R N A L S U B W O O F E R A W A Y F R O M T H E C O M P U T E R O R M O N I T O R If your external speaker system includes a subwoofer, ensure that the subwoofer is at least 60 cm (2 ft) away from the computer or external monitor. E L I M I N A T E P O S S I B L E I N T E R F E R E N C E Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, or other appliances. R O T A T E T H E C O M P U T E R T O F A C E A D I F F E R E N T D I R E C T I O N Eliminate sunlight glare, which can cause poor picture quality. A D J U S T T H E W I N D O W S D I S P L A Y S E T T I N G S 1 2 Click Start Control Panel Personalization Display Settings. Appearance and Personalization Click the area you want to change or click the Display icon. Try different settings for Resolution and Colors. R U N T H E V I D E O D I A G N O S T I C S T E S T S If no error message appears and you still have a display problem, but the display is not completely blank, run the Video device group in the "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87, then contact Dell

(see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). S E E "E R R O R M E S S A G E S " If an error message appears, see "Error Messages"

on page 96. If only part of the display is readable C O N N E C T A N E X T E R N A L M O N I T O R 1 2 Shut down your computer and connect an external monitor to the computer. Turn on the computer and the monitor, and then adjust the monitor brightness and contrast controls. If the external monitor works, the computer display or video controller may be defective. Contact Dell (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). 114 Troubleshooting Drivers What Is a Driver?

A driver is a program that controls a device such as a printer, mouse, or keyboard. All devices require a driver program. A driver acts like a translator between the device and any other programs that use the device. Each device has its own set of specialized commands that only its driver recognizes. Dell ships your computer to you with required drivers already installedno further installation or configuration is needed. NOTICE: Your Drivers and Utilities media may contain drivers for operating systems that are not on your computer. Ensure that you are installing software appropriate for your operating system. Many drivers, such as the keyboard driver, come with your Microsoft Windows operating system. You may need to install drivers if you:

Upgrade your operating system. Reinstall your operating system. Connect or install a new device. Identifying Drivers If you experience a problem with any device, identify whether the driver is the source of your problem and, if necessary, update the driver. 1 2 Click Start

, and then right-click Computer. Click Properties, and then click Device Manager. NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue. Scroll down the list of devices and check for an exclamation point (a circle with a [!]) next to the device name. If an exclamation point is next to the device name, you may need to reinstall the driver or install a new driver (see

"Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 116). Troubleshooting 115 Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities NOTICE: The Dell Support website at support.dell.com and your Drivers and Utilities media provide approved drivers for Dell computers. If you install drivers obtained from other sources, your computer might not work correctly. Using Windows Device Driver Rollback If a problem occurs on your computer after you install or update a driver, use Windows Device Driver Rollback to replace the driver with the previously installed version. 1 2 3 4 Click Start

, and then right-click Computer. Click Properties, and then click Device Manager. NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to enter the Device Manager. Right-click the device for which the new driver was installed and click Properties. Click the Drivers tab, and then click Roll Back Driver. If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, use System Restore

(see "Restoring Your Operating System" on page 118) to return your computer to the operating state that existed before you installed the new driver. Using the Drivers and Utilities Media If using Device Driver Rollback or System Restore (see "Restoring Your Operating System" on page 118) does not resolve the problem, reinstall the driver from your Drivers and Utilities media. 1 2 3 With the Windows desktop displayed, insert your Drivers and Utilities media. If this is your first time to use your Drivers and Utilities media, continue to step 2. If not, proceed to step 5. When the Drivers and Utilities installation program starts, follow the prompts on the screen. NOTE: In most cases, the Drivers and Utilities program starts running automatically. If it does not, start Windows Explorer, click your media drive directory to display the media contents, and then double-click the autorcd.exe file. When the InstallShield Wizard Complete window appears, remove the Drivers and Utilities disc and click Finish to restart the computer. 116 Troubleshooting 4 5 6 When you see the Windows desktop, reinsert the Drivers and Utilities disc. At the Welcome Dell System Owner screen, click Next. NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities program displays drivers only for hardware that came installed in your computer. If you installed additional hardware, the drivers for the new hardware might not be displayed. If those drivers are not displayed, exit the Drivers and Utilities program. For drivers information, see the documentation that came with the device. A message stating that the Drivers and Utilities program is detecting hardware in your computer appears. The drivers that are used by your computer are automatically displayed in the My DriversThe ResourceCD has identified these components in your system window. Click the driver that you want to reinstall and follow the instructions on the screen. If a particular driver is not listed, then that driver is not required by your operating system. Manually Reinstalling Drivers NOTE: If your computer has a Consumer IR port and you are reinstalling a Consumer IR driver, you must first enable the Consumer IR port in the system setup program (see "Using the System Setup Program" on page 161) before continuing with the driver installation (see "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 116). For information about components installed on your computer, see "Determining Your Computers Configuration" on page 19. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 After extracting the driver files to your hard drive, as described in the previous section, click Start

, and then right-click Computer. Click Properties, and then click Device Manager. Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver (for example, Modems or Infrared devices). Double-click the name of the device for which you are installing the driver. Click Driver tab, and then click Update Driver. Click Install from a list or specific location (Advanced), and then click Next. Click Browse and browse to the location to which you previously copied the driver files. Troubleshooting 117 8 9 When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click Next. Click Finish, and then restart your computer. Troubleshooting Software and Hardware Problems If a device is either not detected during the operating system setup or is detected but incorrectly configured, use Windows Vista Help and Support to resolve the incompatibility:

1 2 3 Click Start Help and Support. Type hardware troubleshooter in the search field, then press

<Enter>. In the search results, select the option that best describes the problem and follow the remaining troubleshooting steps. Restoring Your Operating System You can restore your operating system in the following ways:

Windows Vista System Restore returns your computer to an earlier operating state without affecting data files. Use System Restore as the first solution for restoring your operating system and preserving data files. For instructions, see "Using Microsoft Windows System Restore" on page 118. If you received Operating System media with your computer, you can use it to restore your operating system. However, using the Operating System media also deletes all data on the hard drive. Use the media only if System Restore did not resolve your operating system problem. For instructions, see "Using the Operating System Media" on page 119. Using Microsoft Windows System Restore The Windows operating system provides System Restore to allow you to return your computer to an earlier operating state (without affecting data files) if changes to the hardware, software, or other system settings have left the computer in an undesirable operating state. Any changes that System Restore makes to your computer are completely reversible. 118 Troubleshooting NOTICE: Make regular backups of your data files. System Restore does not monitor your data files or recover them. NOTE: The procedures in this document were written for the Windows default view, so they may not apply if you set your Dell computer to the Windows Classic view. Click Start Help and Support. Type System Restore in the search field, then press <Enter>. NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action. Click Next and follow the remaining prompts on the screen. 1 2 3 In the event that System Restore did not resolve the issue, you may undo the last system restore. Undoing the Last System Restore NOTICE: Before you undo the last system restore, save and close all open files and exit any open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. Click Start Help and Support. Type System Restore in the search field and press <Enter>. Click Undo my last restoration, and then click Next. 1 2 3 Using the Operating System Media Before You Begin If you are considering reinstalling the Windows operating system to correct a problem with a newly installed driver, first try using Windows Device Driver Rollback (see "Using Windows Device Driver Rollback" on page 116). If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore to return your operating system to the operating state it was in before you installed the new device driver (see "Using Microsoft Windows System Restore" on page 118). NOTICE: Before performing the installation, back up all data files on your primary hard drive. For conventional hard drive configurations, the primary hard drive is the first drive detected by the computer. To reinstall Windows, you need the following items:

Troubleshooting 119 Dell Operating System media Dell Drivers and Utilities media NOTE: Your Drivers and Utilities media contains drivers that were installed during assembly of the computer. Use your Drivers and Utilities media to load any required drivers, including the drivers required if your computer has a RAID controller. Reinstalling Windows The reinstallation process can take 1 to 2 hours to complete. After you reinstall the operating system, you must also reinstall the device drivers, virus protection program, and other software. NOTICE: The Operating System media provides options for reinstalling Windows. The options can overwrite files and possibly affect programs that are installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall Windows unless a Dell technical support representative instructs you to do so. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. Insert the Operating System media. Click Exit if the Install Windows message appears. Restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press <F12> immediately. NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop, then shut down your computer and try again. NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in the system setup program. When the boot device list appears, highlight CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive, and then press <Enter>. Press any key to Boot from CD-ROM. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. NOTE: You cannot reinstall Dell MediaDirect if you voluntarily reformat the hard drive. You need the installation software to reinstall Dell MediaDirect. Contact Dell for assistance (see "Contacting Dell" on page 152). 120 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 121 122 Troubleshooting Adding and Replacing Parts Before You Begin This chapter provides procedures for removing and installing the components in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the following conditions exist:

You have performed the steps in "Turning Off Your Computer" (see

"Turning Off Your Computer" on page 123) and "Before Working Inside Your Computer" (see "Before Working Inside Your Computer" on page 124). You have read the safety information in your Dell Product Information Guide. A component can be replaced orif purchased separatelyinstalled by performing the removal procedure in reverse order. Recommended Tools The procedures in this document may require the following tools:

Small flat-blade screwdriver Phillips screwdriver Small plastic scribe Flash BIOS update program (see the Dell Support website at support.dell.com) Turning Off Your Computer NOTICE: To avoid losing data, save and close any open files and exit any open programs before you turn off your computer. 1 Shut down the operating system:

a b Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, click the Start button, and then click Turn Off Computer. In the Turn off computer window, click Turn off. Adding and Replacing Parts 123 The computer turns off after the operating system shutdown process finishes. 2 Ensure that the computer and any attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your operating system, press and hold the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off. Before Working Inside Your Computer Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to help ensure your own personal safety. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a processor by its edges, not by its pins. NOTICE: Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer. Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent the computer cover from being scratched. Turn off your computer. See "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 123. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. Disconnect any telephone or network cables from the computer. 1 2 3 124 Adding and Replacing Parts NOTICE: To avoid damaging the system board, you must remove the battery before you service the computer. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets. Remove the battery. Slide and hold the battery-bay latch release on the bottom of the computer, and then remove the battery from the bay. 1 2 1 battery-bay latch release 2 battery Press the power button to ground the system board. Remove any installed ExpressCards from the ExpressCard slot. 4 5 6 7 Hard Drive CAUTION: If you remove the hard drive from the computer when the drive is hot, do not touch the metal housing of the hard drive. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in the section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. Adding and Replacing Parts 125 NOTICE: To prevent data loss, turn off your computer (see page 123) before removing the hard drive. Do not remove the hard drive while the computer is on, in standby mode, or in hibernate mode. NOTICE: Hard drives are extremely fragile; even a slight bump can damage the drive. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). NOTICE: To avoid damaging the system board, you must remove the battery before you begin working inside the computer. NOTE: Dell does not guarantee compatibility or provide support for hard drives from sources other than Dell. NOTE: If you are installing a hard drive from a source other than Dell, you need to install an operating system, drivers, and utilities on the new hard drive. See

"Restoring Your Operating System" on page 118 and "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 116. To replace the hard drive:

1 2 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 123. Turn the computer over, and remove the hard drive screws. 126 Adding and Replacing Parts 1 2 1 hard drive screws (2) 2 hard drive NOTICE: When the hard drive is not in the computer, store it in protective antistatic packaging. See "Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge" in the Product Information Guide. 3 4 5 6 7 Slide the hard drive out of the computer. Remove the new drive from its packaging. Save the original packaging for storing or shipping the hard drive. NOTICE: Use firm and even pressure to slide the drive into place. If you use excessive force, you may damage the connector. Slide the hard drive into the bay until it is fully seated. Replace and tighten the screws. If the new hard drive is not already pre-imaged, install the operating system and drivers for your computer. See "Restoring Your Operating System" on page 118 and "Reinstalling Drivers and Utilities" on page 116. Adding and Replacing Parts 127 Returning a Hard Drive to Dell Return your old hard drive to Dell in its original or comparable foam packaging. Otherwise, the hard drive may be damaged in transit. 2 1 1 foam packaging 2 hard drive Memory You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. See "Specifications" on page 153 for information on the memory supported by your computer. Install only memory modules that are intended for your computer. NOTE: In order to take advantage of the dual channel bandwidth capability, both memory slots must be populated and must match in size. NOTE: Memory modules purchased from Dell are covered under your computer warranty. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). 128 Adding and Replacing Parts 1 2 3 4 NOTICE: To avoid damaging the system board, you must remove the battery before you begin working inside the computer. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 123. Ground yourself by touching one of the metal connectors on the back of the computer. NOTE: If you leave the area, ground yourself again when you return to the computer. Turn the computer over, loosen the captive screws on the memory module cover, and then remove the cover. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the memory module connector, do not use tools to spread the memory-module securing clips. If you are replacing a memory module, remove the existing module:

a Use your fingertips to carefully spread apart the securing clips on each end of the memory module connector until the module pops up. b Remove the module from the connector. Adding and Replacing Parts 129 1 2 3 1 memory module 2 securing clips 3 memory module

(2 per connector) connector NOTE: If the memory module is not installed properly, the computer may not boot properly. No error message indicates this failure. 5 Ground yourself and install the new memory module:

a b Align the notch in the module edge connector with the tab in the connector slot. Slide the module firmly into the slot at a 45-degree angle, and rotate the module down until it clicks into place. If you do not feel the click, remove the module and reinstall it. 130 Adding and Replacing Parts 6 7 8 Replace the memory module cover. NOTICE: If the cover is difficult to close, remove the module and reinstall it. Forcing the cover to close may damage your computer. Insert the battery into the battery bay, or connect the AC adapter to your computer and an electrical outlet. Turn on the computer. As the computer boots, it detects the additional memory and automatically updates the system configuration information. If prompted, press <F1> to continue. To confirm the amount of memory installed in the computer, click the Start button, click Help and Support

, and then click Computer Information

. Mini-Card If you ordered a Mini-Card with your computer, the card is already installed. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). Adding and Replacing Parts 131 1 2 3 4 NOTICE: To avoid damaging the system board, you must remove the battery before you begin working inside the computer. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 123. Turn the computer over and loosen the captive screws from the Mini-

Card/modem cover. Place your finger under the cover at the indentation, and lift the cover to remove it. If a Mini-Card is not already installed, go to step 5. If you are replacing a Mini-Card, remove the existing card:

a Disconnect the antenna cables from the Mini-Card. 132 Adding and Replacing Parts 1 3 2 1 antenna cables (2) 2 Mini-Card 3 Mini-Card connector b c Release the Mini-Card by pushing the metal securing clips toward the back of the computer until the card pops up slightly. Lift the Mini-Card out of its connector. Adding and Replacing Parts 133 2 1 1 securing clips 2 Mini-Card 134 Adding and Replacing Parts NOTICE: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel resistance, check the connectors and realign the card. 5 Install the replacement Mini-Card:

a Align the Mini-Card with the connector at a 45-degree angle, and press the Mini-Card down into the securing clips until the card clicks into place. 3 2 1 1 securing clips 2 antenna connectors (2) 3 Mini-Card connector NOTICE: To avoid damaging the Mini-Card, never place cables under the card. b Connect the antenna cables to the antenna connectors on the Mini-

Card by matching the color of the cable to the color of the triangle above the connector. Connect the main antenna cable (white) to the antenna connector with the white triangle. Connect the auxiliary antenna cable (black) to the antenna connector with the black triangle. Adding and Replacing Parts 135 NOTE: If your computer has a gray cable, connect it to the connector with the gray triangle, if one is available on your card. 6 Replace the Mini-Card/modem cover. Hinge Cover CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). NOTICE: To avoid damaging the system board, you must remove the battery before you begin working inside the computer. 1 2 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 123. Remove the hinge cover:

a Open the display all the way (180 degrees) so that it lies flat against your work surface. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the hinge cover, do not lift the cover on both sides simultaneously. 136 Adding and Replacing Parts b c Insert a scribe into the indent to lift the hinge cover on the right side. Ease the hinge cover up, moving from right to left, and remove it. 1 1 hinge cover When replacing the hinge cover, first insert the left edge and then press from left to right until the cover snaps into place. Keyboard CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). NOTICE: To avoid damaging the system board, you must remove the battery before you begin working inside the computer. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 123. Open the display and remove the hinge cover. See "Hinge Cover" on page 136. Remove the keyboard:

1 2 3 Adding and Replacing Parts 137 a Remove the two screws at the top of the keyboard. NOTICE: The key caps on the keyboard are fragile, easily dislodged, and time-

consuming to replace. Be careful when removing and handling the keyboard. b Lift the keyboard and hold it up and slightly forward to access to the keyboard connector. c To disconnect the keyboard cable from the keyboard connector on the system board, rotate the keyboard connector latch toward the front of the computer. d Slide the keyboard cable out of the keyboard connector on the system 2 board. 1 5 3 1 4 keyboard keyboard connector latch 4 2 5 keyboard screws (2) 3 keyboard cable keyboard tabs NOTICE: To avoid scratching the palm rest when replacing the keyboard, hook the five tabs along the front edge of the keyboard into the palm rest, and then secure the keyboard in place. Coin-Cell Battery CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. 138 Adding and Replacing Parts 1 2 3 4 1 5 NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). NOTICE: To avoid damaging the system board, you must remove the battery before you begin working inside the computer. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 123. Remove the hinge cover. See "Hinge Cover" on page 136. Remove the keyboard. See "Keyboard" on page 137. Remove the existing coin-cell battery:

a b Pull up on the connector to disconnect the battery cable from the system board. Press the release latch on the side of the coin-cell battery compartment, and lift the battery. 1 2 3 2 coin-cell battery release latch 3 battery cable connector Install the replacement battery:

a Insert the battery at a 30-degree angle under the release latch with the positive side up, and then push the battery into place. Adding and Replacing Parts 139 b Connect the battery cable to the connector on the system board. 6 7 Replace the keyboard. Replace the hinge cover. Optical Drive CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 123. Turn the computer over. Remove the optical-drive security screw. Insert a scribe into the notch and push it to the side to release the drive from the bay. 1 2 3 notch 2 optical-drive security screw 3 optical drive Slide the drive out of the bay. 1 2 3 4 1 5 140 Adding and Replacing Parts To reinstall the optical drive, slide the drive into the drive bay and snap it into place. Then replace the optical-drive security screw. Internal Card With Bluetooth Wireless Technology CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface (such as a connector on the back of the computer). NOTICE: To avoid damaging the system board, you must remove the battery before you begin working inside the computer. If you ordered a card with Bluetooth wireless technology with your computer, it is already installed. 1 2 3 4 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 123. Remove the battery. See "Replacing the Battery" on page 44. Loosen the captive screw and remove the card cover from the computer. Pull the card out of the compartment so that you can disconnect the card from its cable and remove it from the computer. Adding and Replacing Parts 141 3 2 1 1 5 6 7 cable connector 2 card 3 card cover To replace the card, connect the card to the cable and then carefully insert it into the compartment. Replace the card cover and tighten the screw. Replace the battery. 142 Adding and Replacing Parts Dell QuickSet Features NOTE: This feature may not be available on your computer. Dell QuickSet provides you with easy access to configure or view the following types of settings:

Network connectivity Display System information Depending on what you want to do in Dell QuickSet, you can start it by either clicking, double-clicking, or right-clicking the QuickSet icon in the Microsoft Windows notification area. The notification area is located in the lower-right corner of your screen. For more information about QuickSet, right-click the QuickSet icon and select Help

. Dell QuickSet Features 143 144 Dell QuickSet Features Traveling With Your Computer Identifying Your Computer Attach a name tag or business card to the computer. Write down your Service Tag and store it in a safe place away from the computer or carrying case. Use the Service Tag if you need to report a loss or theft to law enforcement officials and to Dell. Create a file on the Microsoft Windows desktop called if_found. Place information such as your name, address, and phone number in this file. Contact your credit card company and ask if it offers coded identification tags. Packing the Computer Remove any external devices attached to the computer and store them in a safe place. Fully charge the main battery and any spare batteries that you plan to carry with you. Shut down the computer. Disconnect the AC adapter. NOTICE: When the display is closed, extraneous items on the keyboard or palm rest could damage the display. Remove any extraneous items, such as paper clips, pens, and paper, from the keyboard and palm rest and close the display. Use the optional Dell carrying case to pack the computer and its accessories together safely. Avoid packing the computer with items such as shaving cream, colognes, perfumes, or food. NOTICE: If the computer has been exposed to extreme temperatures, allow it to acclimate to room temperature for 1 hour before turning it on. Traveling With Your Computer 145 Protect the computer, the batteries, and the hard drive from hazards such as extreme temperatures and overexposure to sunlight, dirt, dust, or liquids. Pack the computer so that it does not slide around in the trunk of your car or in an overhead storage compartment. Travel Tips NOTICE: Do not move the computer while using the optical drive to prevent loss of data. NOTICE: Do not check the computer as baggage. Consider disabling wireless activity on your computer to maximize battery operating time. To disable wireless activity, use the wireless switch. Consider changing your power management options to maximize battery operating time (see "Configuring Power Management Settings" on page 42). If you are traveling internationally, carry proof of ownershipor of your right to use the computer if it is company-ownedto speed your passage through customs. Investigate the customs regulations of the countries you plan to visit, and consider acquiring an international carnet (also known as a merchandise passport) from your government. Find out what type of electrical outlets are used in the countries you will visit, and have appropriate power adapters. Check with your credit card company for information about the kinds of emergency travel assistance it offers to users of portable computers. Traveling by Air NOTICE: Do not walk the computer through a metal detector. Send the computer through an X-ray machine or have it hand-inspected. Ensure that you have a charged battery available in case you are asked to turn on the computer. Prior to entering the airplane, verify that using a computer is permitted. Some airlines forbid the use of electronic devices during flight. All airlines forbid the use of electronic devices during takeoff and landing. 146 Traveling With Your Computer Getting Help Obtaining Assistance CAUTION: If you need to remove the computer cover, first disconnect the computer power and modem cables from all electrical outlets. If you experience a problem with your computer, you can complete the following steps to diagnose and troubleshoot the problem:

1 2 3 4 5 See "Troubleshooting" on page 87 for information and procedures that pertain to the problem your computer is experiencing. See "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87 for procedures on how to run Dell Diagnostics. Fill out the "Diagnostics Checklist" on page 151. Use Dell's extensive suite of online services available at Dell Support

(support.dell.com) for help with installation and troubleshooting procedures. See "Online Services" on page 148 for a more extensive list of Dell Support online. If the preceding steps have not resolved the problem, see "Contacting Dell" on page 152. NOTE: Call Dell Support from a telephone near or at the computer so that the support staff can assist you with any necessary procedures. NOTE: Dell's Express Service Code system may not be available in all countries. When prompted by Dell's automated telephone system, enter your Express Service Code to route the call directly to the proper support personnel. If you do not have an Express Service Code, open the Dell Accessories folder, double-click the Express Service Code icon, and follow the directions. For instructions on using the Dell Support, see "Technical Support and Customer Service" on page 148. NOTE: Some of the following services are not always available in all locations outside the continental U.S. Call your local Dell representative for information on availability. Getting Help 147 Technical Support and Customer Service Dell's support service is available to answer your questions about Dell hardware. Our support staff uses computer-based diagnostics to provide fast, accurate answers. To contact Dell's support service, see "Before You Call" on page 150, and then see the contact information for your region or go to support.dell.com

. DellConnect DellConnect is a simple online access tool that allows a Dell service and support associate to access your computer through a broadband connection, diagnose your problem and repair it all under your supervision. For more information, go to support.dell.com and click DellConnect. Online Services You can learn about Dell products and services on the following websites:

www.dell.com www.dell.com/ap (Asian/Pacific countries only) www.dell.com/jp (Japan only) www.euro.dell.com (Europe only) www.dell.com/la (Latin American and Caribbean countries) www.dell.ca (Canada only) You can access Dell Support through the following websites and e-mail addresses:

Dell Support websites support.dell.com support.jp.dell.com (Japan only) support.euro.dell.com (Europe only) Dell Support e-mail addresses mobile_support@us.dell.com support@us.dell.com la-techsupport@dell.com (Latin America and Caribbean countries only) apsupport@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only) 148 Getting Help Dell Marketing and Sales e-mail addresses apmarketing@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only) sales_canada@dell.com (Canada only) Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) ftp.dell.com Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password. AutoTech Service Dell's automated support serviceAutoTechprovides recorded answers to the questions most frequently asked by Dell customers about their portable and desktop computers. When you call AutoTech, use your touch-tone telephone to select the subjects that correspond to your questions. For the telephone number to call for your region, see "Contacting Dell" on page 152. Automated Order-Status Service To check on the status of any Dell products that you have ordered, you can go support.dell.com to

, or you can call the automated order-status service. A recording prompts you for the information needed to locate and report on your order. For the telephone number to call for your region, see "Contacting Dell" on page 152. Problems With Your Order If you have a problem with your order, such as missing parts, wrong parts, or incorrect billing, contact Dell for customer assistance. Have your invoice or packing slip handy when you call. For the telephone number to call for your region, see "Contacting Dell" on page 152. Product Information If you need information about additional products available from Dell, or if you would like to place an order, visit the Dell website at www.dell.com

. For the telephone number to call for your region or to speak to a sales specialist, see the "Contacting Dell" on page 152. Getting Help 149 Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit Prepare all items being returned, whether for repair or credit, as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 Call Dell to obtain a Return Material Authorization Number, and write it clearly and prominently on the outside of the box. For the telephone number to call for your region, see "Contacting Dell" on page 152. Include a copy of the invoice and a letter describing the reason for the return. Include a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist (see "Diagnostics Checklist"

on page 151), indicating the tests that you have run and any error messages reported by the Dell Diagnostics (see "Dell Diagnostics" on page 87). Include any accessories that belong with the item(s) being returned (power cables, software floppy disks, guides, and so on) if the return is for credit. Pack the equipment to be returned in the original (or equivalent) packing materials. You are responsible for paying shipping expenses. You are also responsible for insuring any product returned, and you assume the risk of loss during shipment to Dell. Collect On Delivery (C.O.D.) packages are not accepted. Returns that are missing any of the preceding requirements will be refused at Dells receiving dock and returned to you. Before You Call NOTE: Have your Express Service Code ready when you call. The code helps Dells automated-support telephone system direct your call more efficiently. You may also be asked for your Service Tag (located on the back or bottom of your computer). Remember to fill out the Diagnostics Checklist (see "Diagnostics Checklist"

on page 151). If possible, turn on your computer before you call Dell for assistance and call from a telephone at or near the computer. You may be asked to type some commands at the keyboard, relay detailed information during operations, or try other troubleshooting steps possible only at the computer itself. Ensure that the computer documentation is available. CAUTION: Before working inside your computer, follow the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide. 150 Getting Help Diagnostics Checklist Name:

Date:

Address:

Phone number:

Service Tag (bar code on the back or bottom of the computer):

Express Service Code:

Return Material Authorization Number (if provided by Dell support technician):

Operating system and version:

Devices:

Expansion cards:

Are you connected to a network? Yes No Network, version, and network adapter:

Programs and versions:

See your operating system documentation to determine the contents of the systems start-up files. If the computer is connected to a printer, print each file. Otherwise, record the contents of each file before calling Dell. Error message, beep code, or diagnostic code:

Description of problem and troubleshooting procedures you performed:

Getting Help 151 Contacting Dell NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog. Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options. Because availability varies by country and product, some services may not be available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer service issues:

1 2 3 4 5 Visit www.support.dell.com. At the bottom of the page, verify your country or region. Locate the Browse by Category section on the left side of the page and click Contact Us. Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need. Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you. 152 Getting Help Specifications NOTE: Your computer comes in different configurations. To determine the configuration of your computer, see "Determining Your Computers Configuration" on page 19. Processor Processor type Intel Core 2 Duo processor L1 cache L2 cache Intel Core 2 Quad processor 64 KB 2 MB or 4 MB (Intel Core 2 Duo processor) 8 MB (Intel Core 2 Quad processor) External bus frequency (front side 800 MHz (Intel Core 2 Duo processor) bus) System Information 1066 MHz (Intel Core 2 Quad processor) System chip set Mobile Intel 965GM Express Data bus width 64 bits DRAM bus width dual channel bus Processor address bus width 32 bits Flash EPROM PCI bus 2 MB 32 bits

(PCI-Express used for video x16 controllers) ExpressCard NOTE: The ExpressCard slot is designed only for ExpressCards. It does NOT support PC Cards. ExpressCard connector one ExpressCard slot (54 mm) 1.5 V and 3.3 V Specifications 153 ExpressCard (continued) Cards supported ExpressCard/34 (34 mm) and ExpressCard/54 (54 mm) ExpressCard connector size 26 pins Memory Memory module connector two user-accessible SODIMM connectors Memory module capacities 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, and 4 GB Memory type 1.8 V SODIMM DDR-II supports DDR-II up to 667 MHz Minimum memory 1 GB (via 2 x 512 MB SODIMM DDR-II modules) Maximum memory 4 GB (via 2 x 2 GB SODIMM DDR-II modules) or 8 GB (via 2 x 4 GB SODIMM DDR-II modules) NOTE: In order to take advantage of the dual channel bandwidth capability, both memory slots must be populated and must match in size. 8-in-1 Media Memory card Reader 8-in-1 media memory card controller Ricoh R5C833 8-in-1 media memory card connector 8-in-1 combo card connector Cards supported Secure Digital (SD) SDIO MultiMediaCard (MMC) Memory Stick Memory Stick PRO xD-Picture Card Hi Speed-SD Hi Density-SD 154 Specifications Ports and Connectors Audio microphone-in connector, two stereo headphones/speakers connector IEEE 1394a 4-pin mini, nonpowered connector Consumer IR sensor compatible with Philips RC6 (receive Network adapter RJ-45 port only) S-video TV-out 7-pin mini-DIN connector (optional S-video to composite video adapter cable; optional S-video to component video adapter cable) USB four 4-pin USB 2.0-compliant connectors Dual link DVI-I (Digital Video 29-pin connector Interface) Communications Network adapter 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet LAN on system board Wireless internal PCI-e Mini-Card WLAN(802.11a/g, 802.11g, 802.11n/MIMO)support internal PCI-e Mini-Card(Dell 5700 EVDO and HSDPA) and external ExpressCard WWAN support internal card with Bluetooth wireless technology support Video NOTE: Your computer comes in different configurations with different video controller cards. To determine the configuration of your computer, see "Determining Your Computers Configuration" on page 19. Video controller:

NVIDIA GeForce 8800 GS Video type discrete video adapter Data bus PCI Express x16 Video memory 256 MB Specifications 155 Video (continued) LCD interface LVDS TV support NTSC or PAL in S-video, component, and composite modes ATSC for TV tuner card (TVT8) Audio Audio type High Definition Audio (HDA) codec Stereo conversion 24-bit (analog-to-digital and digital-to-

Interfaces:

Internal External analog) HDA bus microphone-in connector, two stereo headphones/speakers connector Speaker four stereo 8-ohm main speakers with two 18 mm transducers per side and one subwoofer with bass reflex port bluetooth speaker adapter Internal speaker amplifier stereo 5-W per channel Class D amplifier, 10 W total power Volume controls keyboard shortcuts, program menus, media control buttons Audio controller Sigmatel STAC9228 High Definition Audio codec Headphones bluetooth stereo headphones Media Drive Interface Display CD-RW, DVD combo, Blu-ray Roxio Creator Plus

, Dell MediaDirect 3.4 Type (active-matrix TFT) WUXGA Dimensions:

156 Specifications Display (continued) Height Width 245.0 mm (9.64 inches) 383.0 mm (15 inches) Diagonal 431.8 mm (17 inches) Maximum resolution 1920 x 1200 at 16.7 million colors Refresh rate 60 Hz Operating angle Viewing angle (typical):

0

(closed) to 180 Horizontal Vertical 60 45 Pixel pitch 0.191 mm (17-inch display) Power consumption (panel with backlight) (typical):

7.54 W Controls brightness can be controlled through keyboard shortcuts Keyboard Number of keys 101 (U.S. and Canada); 88 (Europe);

Layout Type Camera Pixel 91 (Japan) QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji LED backlit, 16 color 2.0 mega pixel Video Resolution 640x480 at 30fps Diagonal Viewing Angle 60 Touch Pad X/Y position resolution

(graphics table mode) 240 cpi Size:

Width 73.0-mm (2.88-inch) sensor-active area Specifications 157 Touch Pad (continued) Height 42.9-mm (1.69-inch) rectangle Battery Type Dimensions:

Depth Height Width Weight Voltage 9-cell "smart" lithium ion 88.5 mm (3.48 inches) 21.5 mm (0.83 inch) 139.0 mm (5.47 inches) 0.48 kg (1.1 lb) (9 cell) 10.8 VDC Charge time (approximate):

Computer off 4 hours (at 100% in 4 hours) 2 hour (at 80% in 2 hours) Operating time Battery operating time varies depending on operating conditions and can be significantly reduced under certain power-intensive conditions. See "Power Problems" on page 108. See "Using a Battery" on page 39 for more information on battery life. Life span (approximate) 300 discharge/charge cycles Temperature range:

Operating Storage 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) 158 Specifications AC Adapter NOTE: For optimum system performance, you should always use a 130-W AC adapter. Using less-powerful AC adapters may cause you to receive a WARNING message and may also cause your computer to experience a degradation in performance. Input voltage 90264 VAC Input current (maximum) 3.2 A Input frequency 4763 Hz Output current 11.8 A (continuous), 12.8A peak 4 second Output power pulse 230 W Rated output voltage 19.5 VDC Dimensions:

Height Width Depth 43 mm (1.7 inches) 100 mm (3.93 inches) 200 mm (7.87 inches) Weight (with cables) 1.3 kg (2.86 lb) Temperature range:

Operating 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Storage 40 to 65C (40 to 158F) Physical Height Width Depth 50.8 mm (2.0 inches) 406 mm (16 inches) 302 mm (11.9 inches) Weight (with 9-cell battery and 4.89 kg (10.8 lb) optical drive) Environmental Temperature range:

Operating 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) Specifications 159 Environmental (continued) Storage Relative humidity:

40 to 65C (40 to 149F) Operating 10% to 90% (noncondensing) Storage 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration (using a random-vibration spectrum that simulates user environment):

Operating 0.66 GRMS Storage 1.3 GRMS Maximum shock (measured with a 2-ms half-sine pulse):

Operating Storage Altitude (maximum):

143 G 163 G Operating 15.2 to 3048 m (50 to 10,000 ft) Storage 15.2 to 10,668 m (50 to 35,000 ft) 160 Specifications Appendix Using the System Setup Program NOTE: Your operating system may automatically configure most of the options available in system setup, thus overriding options that you set through system setup. An exception is the External Hot Key option, which you can disable or enable only through system setup. For more information on configuring features for your operating system, see Windows Help and Support (click Start Help and Support).

, and then click You can use system setup as follows:

To set or change user-selectable features such as your computer password To verify information about the computer's current configuration such as the amount of system memory After you set up the computer, run system setup to familiarize yourself with your system configuration information and optional settings. You may want to write down the information for future reference. The system setup screens display the current setup information and settings for your computer, such as:

System configuration Boot order Boot (start-up) configuration Basic device configuration settings System security and hard drive password settings NOTE: Unless you are an expert computer user or are directed to do so by Dell technical support, do not change the system setup settings. Certain changes might make your computer work incorrectly. Appendix 161 Viewing the System Setup Screen 1 2 Turn on (or restart) your computer. When the DELL logo appears, press <F2> immediately. If you wait too long and the Microsoft Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop, then shut down your computer and try again. System Setup Screen NOTE: For information about a specific item on a system setup screen, highlight the item and see the Help area on the screen. On each screen, the system setup options are listed at the left. To the right of each option is the setting or value for that option. You can change settings that appear as white type on the screen. Options or values that you cannot change (because they are determined by the computer) appear less bright. The upper-right corner of the screen displays help information for the currently highlighted option; the lower-right corner displays information about the computer. System setup key functions are listed across the bottom of the screen. Commonly Used Options Certain options require that you reboot the computer for new settings to take effect. Changing the Boot Sequence The boot sequence, boot order, or tells the computer where to look to find the software needed to start the operating system. You can control the boot sequence and enable/disable devices using the page of the system Boot Order setup program. NOTE: To change the boot sequence on a one-time-only basis, see "Performing a One-Time Boot" on page 163. The Boot Order page displays a general list of the bootable devices that may be installed in your computer, including but not limited to the following:

Diskette Drive Internal HDD 162 Appendix USB Storage Device CD/DVD/CD-RW drive Modular bay HDD NOTE: Only devices that are preceded by a number are bootable. During the boot routine, the computer starts at the top of the list and scans each enabled device for the operating system start-up files. When the computer finds the files, it stops searching and starts the operating system. To control the boot devices, select (highlight) a device by pressing the down-

arrow or up-arrow key, and then enable or disable the device or change its order in the list. To enable or disable a device, highlight the item and press the space bar. Enabled items are preceded by a number; disabled items are not preceded by a number. To reorder a device in the list, highlight the device and press <u> to move the device up the list or <d> to move a device down the list. Boot sequence changes take effect as soon as you save the changes and exit the system setup program. Performing a One-Time Boot You can set a one-time-only boot sequence without entering the system setup program (you can also use this procedure to boot the Dell Diagnostics on the diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive). 1 2 3 4 Shut down the computer through the Start menu. Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. Turn on the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press <F12>

immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop, then shut down your computer and try again. When the boot device list appears, highlight the device from which you want to boot and press <Enter>. The computer boots to the selected device. The next time you reboot the computer, the previous boot order is restored. Appendix 163 Cleaning Your Computer CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide. Computer, Keyboard, and Display CAUTION: Before you clean your computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet and remove any installed batteries. Clean your computer with a soft cloth dampened with water. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners, which may contain flammable substances. Use a can of compressed air to remove dust from between the keys on the keyboard and to remove any dirt or lint from the display. NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the computer or display, do not spray cleaning solution directly onto the display. Only use products specifically designed for cleaning displays, and follow the instructions that are included with the product. Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with either water or a display cleaner. Do not use alcohol or an ammonia-based cleaner. Wipe the display gently working from the center to the edges until it is clean and any fingerprints are removed. Do not use excessive pressure. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the antiglare coating, do not wipe the display with soap or alcohol. Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water and wipe the computer and keyboard. Do not allow water from the cloth to seep between the touch pad and the surrounding palm rest. To clean your monitor screen, lightly dampen a soft, clean cloth with water. You can also use a special screen-cleaning tissue or solution suitable for the monitors antistatic coating. Wipe the keyboard, computer, and monitor plastics with a soft cleaning cloth moistened with a solution of three parts water and one part dishwashing detergent. NOTICE: Do not soak the cloth or let water drip inside your computer or keyboard. 164 Appendix Touch Pad 1 2 3 4 Shut down and turn off your computer (see "Turning Off Your Computer"

on page 123). Disconnect any attached devices from the computer and from their electrical outlets. Remove any installed batteries (see "Battery Performance" on page 39). Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water, and wipe it gently across the surface of the touch pad. Do not allow water from the cloth to seep between the touch pad and the surrounding palm rest. Mouse NOTICE: Disconnect the mouse from the computer before cleaning the mouse If your screen cursor skips or moves abnormally, clean the mouse. Cleaning a Non-Optical Mouse 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Clean the outside casing of the mouse with a cloth moistened with a mild cleaning solution. Turn the retainer ring on the underside of your mouse counterclockwise, and then remove the ball. Wipe the ball with a clean, lint-free cloth. Blow carefully into the ball cage or use a can of compressed air to dislodge dust and lint. If the rollers inside the ball cage are dirty, clean the rollers with a cotton swab moistened lightly with isopropyl alcohol. Recenter the rollers in their channels if they are misaligned. Ensure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers. Replace the ball and retainer ring, and turn the retainer ring clockwise until it clicks into place. Cleaning an Optical Mouse Clean the outside casing of the mouse with a cloth moistened with a mild cleaning solution. Appendix 165 Media NOTICE: Always use compressed air to clean the lens in the optical drive, and follow the instructions that come with the compressed air product. Never touch the lens in the drive. If you notice problems, such as skipping, with the playback quality of your media, try cleaning the discs. 1 2 Hold the disc by its outer edge. You can also touch the inside edge of the center hole. NOTICE: To help prevent damage to the surface, do not wipe in a circular motion around the disc. With a soft, lint-free cloth, gently wipe the bottom of the disc (the unlabeled side) in a straight line from the center to the outer edge of the disc. For stubborn dirt, try using water or a diluted solution of water and mild soap. You can also purchase commercial products that clean discs and provide some protection from dust, fingerprints, and scratches. Cleaning products for CDs are also safe to use on DVDs. Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only) Technician assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the operating system, software programs, and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the computer and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical support is available at support.dell.com

. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase. Dell provides limited technical support for the computer and any "Dell-

installed" software and peripherals

. Support for third-party software and 1 peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed through Dell Software and Peripherals, Readyware, and Custom Factory Integration

. 2 1 Repair services are provided pursuant to the terms and conditions of your limited warranty and any optional support service contract purchased with the computer. 2 All Dell-standard components included in a Custom Factory Integration (CFI) project are covered by the standard Dell limited warranty for your computer. However, Dell also extends a parts replacement program to cover all nonstandard, third-party hardware components integrated through CFI for the duration of the computers service contract. 166 Appendix Definition of "Dell-Installed" Software and Peripherals Dell-installed software includes the operating system and some of the software programs that are installed on the computer during the manufacturing process (Microsoft Office, Norton Antivirus, etc). Dell-installed peripherals include any internal expansion cards, or Dell-branded module bay or ExpressCard accessories. In addition, any Dell-branded monitors, keyboards, mice, speakers, microphones for telephonic modems, networking products, and all associated cabling are included. Definition of "Third-Party" Software and Peripherals Third-party software and peripherals include any peripheral, accessory, or software program sold by Dell not under the Dell brand (printers, scanners, cameras, games, etc). Support for all third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer of the product. FCC Notice (U.S. Only) FCC Class B This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturers instruction manual, may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTICE: The FCC regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell Inc. could void your authority to operate this equipment. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does Appendix 167 cause harmful interference with radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient the receiving antenna. Relocate the system with respect to the receiver. Move the system away from the receiver. Plug the system into a different outlet so that the system and the receiver are on different branch circuits. If necessary, consult a representative of Dell Inc. or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The following information is provided on the device or devices covered in this document in compliance with the FCC regulations:

Product name:

Dell XPS M1730 Model number:

PP06XA Company name:

Dell Inc. Worldwide Regulatory Compliance & Environmental Affairs One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 USA 512-338-4400 Macrovision Product Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 168 Appendix Glossary Terms in this Glossary are provided for informational purposes only and may or may not describe features included with your particular computer. A AC alternating current The form of electricity that powers your computer when you plug the AC adapter power cable in to an electrical outlet. ACPI advanced configuration and power interface A power management specification that enables Microsoft Windows operating systems to put a computer in standby or hibernate mode to conserve the amount of electrical power allocated to each device attached to the computer. AGP accelerated graphics port A dedicated graphics port that allows system memory to be used for video-related tasks. AGP delivers a smooth, true-color video image because of the faster interface between the video circuitry and the computer memory. AHCI Advanced Host Controller Interface An interface for a SATA hard drive Host Controller which allows the storage driver to enable technologies such as Native Command Queuing (NCQ) and hot plug. ALS ambient light sensor A feature that helps to control display brightness. antivirus software A program designed to identify, quarantine, and/or delete viruses from your computer. ASF alert standards format A standard to define a mechanism for reporting hardware and software alerts to a management console. ASF is designed to be platform- and operating system-independent. B battery life span The length of time (years) during which a portable computer battery is able to be depleted and recharged. battery operating time The length of time (minutes or hours) that a portable computer battery powers the computer. BIOS basic input/output system A program (or utility) that serves as an interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. Unless you Glossary 169 understand what effect these settings have on the computer, do not change them. Also referred to as system setup. bit The smallest unit of data interpreted by your computer. Bluetooth wireless technology A wireless technology standard for short-range (9 m [29 feet]) networking devices that allows for enabled devices to automatically recognize each other. boot sequence Specifies the order of the devices from which the computer attempts to boot. bootable CD A CD that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable CD or floppy disk available. Your Drivers and Utilities media is a bootable CD. bootable disk A disk that you can use to start your computer. In case your hard drive is damaged or your computer has a virus, ensure that you always have a bootable CD or floppy disk available. bps bits per second The standard unit for measuring data transmission speed. BTU British thermal unit A measurement of heat output. bus A communication pathway between the components in your computer. bus speed The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast a bus can transfer information. byte The basic data unit used by your computer. A byte is usually equal to 8 bits. C C Celsius A temperature measurement scale where 0 is the freezing point and 100 is the boiling point of water. cache A special high-speed storage mechanism which can be either a reserved section of main memory or an independent high-speed storage device. The cache enhances the efficiency of many processor operations. L1 cache Primary cache stored inside the processor. L2 cache Secondary cache which can either be external to the processor or incorporated into the processor architecture. carnet An international customs document that facilitates temporary imports into foreign countries. Also known as a merchandise passport. CD-R CD recordable A recordable version of a CD. Data can be recorded only once onto a CD-R. Once recorded, the data cannot be erased or written over. CD-RW CD rewritable A rewritable version of a CD. Data can be written to a 170 Glossary CD-RW disc, and then erased and written over (rewritten). CD-RW drive A drive that can read CDs and write to CD-RW (rewritable CDs) and CD-R (recordable CDs) discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, but you can write to CD-R discs only once. CD-RW/DVD drive A drive, sometimes referred to as a combo drive, that can read CDs and DVDs and write to CD-RW (rewritable CDs) and CD-R (recordable CDs) discs. You can write to CD-RW discs multiple times, but you can write to CD-R discs only once. clock speed The speed, given in MHz, that indicates how fast computer components that are connected to the system bus operate. CMOS A type of electronic circuit. Computers use a small amount of battery-

powered CMOS memory to hold date, time, and system setup options. COA Certificate of Authenticity The Windows alpha-numeric code located on a sticker on your computer. Also referred to as the Product Key or Product ID. Consumer IR A port that allows you to transfer data between the computer and infrared-compatible devices without using a cable connection. Control Panel A Windows utility that allows you to modify operating system and hardware settings, such as display settings. controller A chip that controls the transfer of data between the processor and memory or between the processor and devices. CRIMM continuity rambus in-line memory module A special module that has no memory chips and is used to fill unused RIMM slots. cursor The marker on a display or screen that shows where the next keyboard, touch pad, or mouse action will occur. It often is a blinking solid line, an underline character, or a small arrow. D DDR SDRAM double-data-rate SDRAM A type of SDRAM that doubles the data burst cycle, improving system performance. DDR2 SDRAM double-data-rate 2 SDRAM A type of DDR SDRAM that uses a 4-bit prefetch and other architectural changes to boost memory speed to over 400 MHz. device Hardware such as a disk drive, printer, or keyboard that is installed in or connected to your computer. device driver See driver. Glossary 171 DIMM dual in-line memory module A circuit board with memory chips that connects to a memory module on the system board. DIN connector A round, six-pin connector that conforms to DIN (Deutsche Industrie-Norm) standards; it is typically used to connect PS/2 keyboard or mouse cable connectors. disk striping A technique for spreading data over multiple disk drives. Disk striping can speed up operations that retrieve data from disk storage. Computers that use disk striping generally allow the user to select the data unit size or stripe width. DMA direct memory access A channel that allows certain types of data transfer between RAM and a device to bypass the processor. DMTF Distributed Management Task Force A consortium of hardware and software companies who develop management standards for distributed desktop, network, enterprise, and Internet environments. domain A group of computers, programs, and devices on a network that are administered as a unit with common rules and procedures for use by a specific group of users. A user logs on to the domain to gain access to the resources. DRAM dynamic random-access memory Memory that stores information in integrated circuits containing capacitors. driver Software that allows the operating system to control a device such as a printer. Many devices do not work properly if the correct driver is not installed in the computer. DSL Digital Subscriber Line A technology that provides a constant, high-speed Internet connection through an analog telephone line. dual-core An Intel technology in which two physical computational units exist inside a single processor package, thereby increasing computing efficiency and multi-

tasking ability. dual display mode A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an extension of your display. Also referred to as extended display mode. DVD-R DVD recordable A recordable version of a DVD. Data can be recorded only once onto a DVD-R. Once recorded, the data cannot be erased or written over. DVD+RW DVD rewritable A rewritable version of a DVD. Data can be written to a DVD+RW disc, and then erased and written over (rewritten). (DVD+RW technology is different from DVD-RW technology.) DVD+RW drive drive that can read DVDs and most CD media and write to DVD+RW (rewritable DVDs) discs. DVI digital video interface A standard for digital transmission between a computer and a digital video display. 172 Glossary E ECC error checking and correction A type of memory that includes special circuitry for testing the accuracy of data as it passes in and out of memory. ECP extended capabilities port A parallel connector design that provides improved bidirectional data transmission. Similar to EPP, ECP uses direct memory access to transfer data and often improves performance. EIDE enhanced integrated device electronics An improved version of the IDE interface for hard drives and CD drives. EMI electromagnetic interference Electrical interference caused by electromagnetic radiation. ENERGY STAR Environmental Protection Agency requirements that decrease the overall consumption of electricity. EPP enhanced parallel port A parallel connector design that provides bidirectional data transmission. ESD electrostatic discharge A rapid discharge of static electricity. ESD can damage integrated circuits found in computer and communications equipment. expansion card A circuit board that installs in an expansion slot on the system board in some computers, expanding the capabilities of the computer. Examples include video, modem, and sound cards. expansion slot A connector on the system board (in some computers) where you insert an expansion card, connecting it to the system bus. ExpressCard A removable I/O card adhering to the PCMCIA standard. Modems and network adapters are common types of ExpressCards. ExpressCards support both the PCI Express and USB 2.0 standard. Express Service Code A numeric code located on a sticker on your Dell computer. Use the Express Service Code when contacting Dell for assistance. Express Service Code service may not be available in some countries. extended display mode A display setting that allows you to use a second monitor as an extension of your display. Also referred to as dual display mode. extended PC Card A PC Card that extends beyond the edge of the PC Card slot when installed. F Fahrenheit A temperature measurement scale where 32 is the freezing point and 212 is the boiling point of water. Glossary 173 FBD fully-buffered DIMM A DIMM with DDR2 DRAM chips and an Advanced Memory Buffer (AMB) that speeds communication between the DDR2 SDRAM chips and the system. FCC Federal Communications Commission A U.S. agency responsible for enforcing communications-related regulations that state how much radiation computers and other electronic equipment can emit. fingerprint reader A strip sensor that uses your unique fingerprint to authenticate your user identity to help secure your computer. folder A term used to describe space on a disk or drive where files are organized and grouped. Files in a folder can be viewed and ordered in various ways, such as alphabetically, by date, and by size. format The process that prepares a drive or disk for file storage. When a drive or disk is formatted, the existing information on it is lost. FSB front side bus The data path and physical interface between the processor and RAM. FTP file transfer protocol A standard Internet protocol used to exchange files between computers connected to the Internet. G G gravity A measurement of weight and force. GB gigabyte A measurement of data storage that equals 1024 MB

(1,073,741,824 bytes). When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to 1,000,000,000 bytes. GHz gigahertz A measurement of frequency that equals one thousand million Hz, or one thousand MHz. The speeds for computer processors, buses, and interfaces are often measured in GHz. graphics mode A video mode that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical pixels by z colors. Graphics modes can display an unlimited variety of shapes and fonts. GUI graphical user interface Software that interacts with the user by means of menus, windows, and icons. Most programs that operate on the Windows operating systems are GUIs. H hard drive A drive that reads and writes data on a hard disk. The terms hard drive and hard disk are often used interchangeably. 174 Glossary heat sink A metal plate on some processors that helps dissipate heat. hibernate mode A power management mode that saves everything in memory to a reserved space on the hard drive and then turns off the computer. When you restart the computer, the memory information that was saved to the hard drive is automatically restored. HTTP hypertext transfer protocol A protocol for exchanging files between computers connected to the Internet. Hyper-Threading Hyper-Threading is an Intel technology that can enhance overall computer performance by allowing one physical processor to function as two logical processors, capable of performing certain tasks simultaneously. Hz hertz A unit of frequency measurement that equals 1 cycle per second. Computers and electronic devices are often measured in kilohertz (kHz), megahertz

(MHz), gigahertz (GHz), or terahertz (THz). I IC integrated circuit A semiconductor wafer, or chip, on which thousands or millions of tiny electronic components are fabricated for use in computer, audio, and video equipment. IDE integrated device electronics An interface for mass storage devices in which the controller is integrated into the hard drive or CD drive. IEEE 1394 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. A high-

performance serial bus used to connect IEEE 1394-compatible devices, such as digital cameras and DVD players, to the computer. infrared sensor A port that allows you to transfer data between the computer and infrared-compatible devices without using a cable connection. integrated Usually refers to components that are physically located on the computers system board. Also referred to as built-in. I/O input/output An operation or device that enters and extracts data from your computer. Keyboards and printers are I/O devices. I/O address An address in RAM that is associated with a specific device (such as a serial connector, parallel connector, or expansion slot) and allows the processor to communicate with that device. IrDA Infrared Data Association The organization that creates international standards for infrared communications. IRQ interrupt request An electronic pathway assigned to a specific device so that the device can communicate with the processor. Each device connection must be Glossary 175 assigned an IRQ. Although two devices can share the same IRQ assignment, you cannot operate both devices simultaneously. ISP Internet service provider A company that allows you to access its host server to connect directly to the Internet, send and receive e-mail, and access websites. The ISP typically provides you with a software package, user name, and access phone numbers for a fee. K Kb kilobit A unit of data that equals 1024 bits. A measurement of the capacity of memory integrated circuits. KB kilobyte A unit of data that equals 1024 bytes but is often referred to as 1000 bytes. key combination A command requiring you to press multiple keys at the same time. kHz kilohertz A measurement of frequency that equals 1000 Hz. L LAN local area network A computer network covering a small area. A LAN usually is confined to a building or a few nearby buildings. A LAN can be connected to another LAN over any distance through telephone lines and radio waves to form a wide area network (WAN). LCD liquid crystal display The technology used by portable computer and flat-

panel displays. LED light-emitting diode An electronic component that emits light to indicate the status of the computer. local bus A data bus that provides a fast throughput for devices to the processor. LPT line print terminal The designation for a parallel connection to a printer or other parallel device. M Mb megabit A measurement of memory chip capacity that equals 1024 Kb. Mbps megabits per second One million bits per second. This measurement is typically used for transmission speeds for networks and modems. MB megabyte A measurement of data storage that equals 1,048,576 bytes. 1 MB 176 Glossary equals 1024 KB. When used to refer to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to 1,000,000 bytes. MB/sec megabytes per second One million bytes per second. This measurement is typically used for data transfer ratings. media bay A bay that supports devices such as optical drives, a second battery, or a Dell TravelLite module. memory A temporary data storage area inside your computer. Because the data in memory is not permanent, it is recommended that you frequently save your files while you are working on them, and always save your files before you shut down the computer. Your computer can contain several different forms of memory, such as RAM, ROM, and video memory. Frequently, the word memory is used as a synonym for RAM. memory address A specific location where data is temporarily stored in RAM. memory mapping The process by which the computer assigns memory addresses to physical locations at start-up. Devices and software can then identify information that the processor can access. memory module A small circuit board containing memory chips, which connects to the system board. MHz megahertz A measure of frequency that equals 1 million cycles per second. The speeds for computer processors, buses, and interfaces are often measured in MHz. Mini PCI A standard for integrated peripheral devices with an emphasis on communications such as modems and NICs. A Mini PCI card is a small external card that is functionally equivalent to a standard PCI expansion card. Mini-Card A small card designed for integrated peripherals, such as communication NICs. The Mini-Card is functionally equivalent to a standard PCI expansion card. Mobile Broadband network (also known as a WWAN) is a series of interconnected computers that communicate with each other through wireless cellular technology and provides Internet access in the same varied locations from which cellular telephone service is available. Your computer can maintain the Mobile Broadband network connection regardless of its physical location, as long as the computer remains in the service area of your cellular service provider. modem A device that allows your computer to communicate with other computers over analog telephone lines. Three types of modems include: external, PC Card, and internal. You typically use your modem to connect to the Internet and exchange e-

mail. module bay See media bay. Glossary 177 MP megapixel A measure of image resolution used for digital cameras. ms millisecond A measure of time that equals one thousandth of a second. Access times of storage devices are often measured in ms. N network adapter A chip that provides network capabilities. A computer may include a network adapter on its system board, or it may contain a PC Card with an adapter on it. A network adapter is also referred to as a NIC (network interface controller). NIC See network adapter. notification area The section of the Windows taskbar that contains icons for providing quick access to programs and computer functions, such as the clock, volume control, and print status. Also referred to as system tray. ns nanosecond A measure of time that equals one billionth of a second. NVRAM nonvolatile random access memory A type of memory that stores data when the computer is turned off or loses its external power source. NVRAM is used for maintaining computer configuration information such as date, time, and other system setup options that you can set. O optical drive A drive that uses optical technology to read or write data from CDs, DVDs, or DVD+RWs. Example of optical drives include CD drives, DVD drives, CD-

RW drives, and CD-RW/DVD combo drives. P parallel connector An I/O port often used to connect a parallel printer to your computer. Also referred to as an LPT port. partition A physical storage area on a hard drive that is assigned to one or more logical storage areas known as logical drives. Each partition can contain multiple logical drives. PC Card A removable I/O card adhering to the PCMCIA standard. Modems and network adapters are common types of PC Cards. PCI peripheral component interconnect PCI is a local bus that supports 32-and 64-bit data paths, providing a high-speed data path between the processor and devices such as video, drives, and networks. 178 Glossary PCI Express A modification to the PCI interface that boosts the data transfer rate between the processor and the devices attached to it. PCI Express can transfer data at speeds from 250 MB/sec to 4 GB/sec. If the PCI Express chip set and the device are capable of different speeds, they will operate at the slower speed. PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association The organization that establishes standards for PC Cards. PIO programmed input/output A method of transferring data between two devices through the processor as part of the data path. pixel A single point on a display screen. Pixels are arranged in rows and columns to create an image. A video resolution, such as 800 x 600, is expressed as the number of pixels across by the number of pixels up and down. Plug-and-Play The ability of the computer to automatically configure devices. Plug and Play provides automatic installation, configuration, and compatibility with existing hardware if the BIOS, operating system, and all devices are Plug and Play compliant. POST power-on self-test Diagnostics programs, loaded automatically by the BIOS, that perform basic tests on the major computer components, such as memory, hard drives, and video. If no problems are detected during POST, the computer continues the start-up. processor A computer chip that interprets and executes program instructions. Sometimes the processor is referred to as the CPU (central processing unit). PS/2 personal system/2 A type of connector for attaching a PS/2-compatible keyboard, mouse, or keypad. PXE pre-boot execution environment A WfM (Wired for Management) standard that allows networked computers that do not have an operating system to be configured and started remotely. R RAID redundant array of independent disks A method of providing data redundancy. Some common implementations of RAID include RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10, and RAID 50. RAM random-access memory The primary temporary storage area for program instructions and data. Any information stored in RAM is lost when you shut down your computer. readme file A text file included with a software package or hardware product. Typically, readme files provide installation information and describe new product enhancements or corrections that have not yet been documented. Glossary 179 read-only Data and/or files you can view but cannot edit or delete. A file can have read-only status if:

It resides on a physically write-protected floppy disk, CD, or DVD. It is located on a network in a directory and the system administrator has assigned rights only to specific individuals. refresh rate The frequency, measured in Hz, at which your screen's horizontal lines are recharged (sometimes also referred to as its vertical frequency). The higher the refresh rate, the less video flicker can be seen by the human eye. resolution The sharpness and clarity of an image produced by a printer or displayed on a monitor. The higher the resolution, the sharper the image. RFI radio frequency interference Interference that is generated at typical radio frequencies, in the range of 10 kHz to 100,000 MHz. Radio frequencies are at the lower end of the electromagnetic frequency spectrum and are more likely to have interference than the higher frequency radiations, such as infrared and light. ROM read-only memory Memory that stores data and programs that cannot be deleted or written to by the computer. ROM, unlike RAM, retains its contents after you shut down your computer. Some programs essential to the operation of your computer reside in ROM. RPM revolutions per minute The number of rotations that occur per minute. Hard drive speed is often measured in rpm. RTC real time clock Battery-powered clock on the system board that keeps the date and time after you shut down the computer. RTCRST real-time clock reset A jumper on the system board of some computers that can often be used for troubleshooting problems. S SAS serial attached SCSI A faster, serial version of the SCSI interface (as opposed to the original SCSI parallel architecture). SATA serial ATA A faster, serial version of the ATA (IDE) interface. ScanDisk A Microsoft utility that checks files, folders, and the hard disks surface for errors. ScanDisk often runs when you restart the computer after it has stopped responding. SCSI small computer system interface A high-speed interface used to connect devices to a computer, such as hard drives, CD drives, printers, and scanners. The SCSI can connect many devices using a single controller. Each device is accessed by an individual identification number on the SCSI controller bus. 180 Glossary SDRAM synchronous dynamic random-access memory A type of DRAM that is synchronized with the optimal clock speed of the processor. serial connector An I/O port often used to connect devices such as a handheld digital device or digital camera to your computer. Service Tag A bar code label on your computer that identifies your computer when you access Dell Support at support.dell.com or when you call Dell for customer service or technical support. setup program A program that is used to install and configure hardware and software. The setup.exe or install.exe program comes with most Windows software packages. Setup program differs from system setup. shortcut An icon that provides quick access to frequently used programs, files, folders, and drives. When you place a shortcut on your Windows desktop and double-

click the icon, you can open its corresponding folder or file without having to find it first. Shortcut icons do not change the location of files. If you delete a shortcut, the original file is not affected. Also, you can rename a shortcut icon. SIM Subscriber Identity Module A SIM card contains a microchip that encrypts voice and data transmissions. SIM cards can be used in phones or portable computers. smart card A card that is embedded with a processor and a memory chip. Smart cards can be used to authenticate a user on computers equipped for smart cards. S/PDIF Sony/Philips Digital Interface An audio transfer file format that allows the transfer of audio from one file to another without converting it to and from an analog format, which could degrade the quality of the file. standby mode A power management mode that shuts down all unnecessary computer operations to save energy. Strike Zone Reinforced area of the platform base that protects the hard drive by acting as a dampening device when a computer experiences resonating shock or is dropped (whether the computer is on or off). surge protectors Prevent voltage spikes, such as those that may occur during an electrical storm, from entering the computer through the electrical outlet. Surge protectors do not protect against lightning strikes or against brownouts, which occur when the voltage drops more than 20 percent below the normal AC-line voltage level. Network connections cannot be protected by surge protectors. Always disconnect the network cable from the network connector during electrical storms. SVGA super-video graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers. Typical SVGA resolutions are 800 x 600 and 1024 x 768. The number of colors and resolution that a program displays depends on the capabilities of the monitor, the video controller and its drivers, and the amount of Glossary 181 video memory installed in the computer. S-video TV-out A connector used to attach a TV or digital audio device to the computer. SXGA super-extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1280 x 1024. SXGA+ super-extended graphics array plus A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1400 x 1050. system board The main circuit board in your computer. Also known as the motherboard. system setup A utility that serves as an interface between the computer hardware and the operating system. System setup allows you to configure user-selectable options in the BIOS, such as date and time or system password. Unless you understand what effect the settings have on the computer, do not change the settings for this program. T TAPI telephony application programming interface Enables Windows programs to operate with a wide variety of telephony devices, including voice, data, fax, and video. text editor A program used to create and edit files that contain only text; for example, Windows Notepad uses a text editor. Text editors do not usually provide word wrap or formatting functionality (the option to underline, change fonts, and so on). TPM trusted platform module A hardware-based security feature that when combined with security software enhances network and computer security by enabling features such as file and e-mail protection. travel module A plastic device designed to fit inside the module bay of a portable computer to reduce the weight of the computer. U UAC user account control Windows Vista security feature that, when enabled, provides an added layer of security between user accounts and access to operating system settings. UMA unified memory allocation System memory dynamically allocated to video. UPS uninterruptible power supply A backup power source used when the 182 Glossary electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level. A UPS keeps a computer running for a limited amount of time when there is no electrical power. UPS systems typically provide surge suppression and may also provide voltage regulation. Small UPS systems provide battery power for a few minutes to enable you to shut down your computer. USB universal serial bus A hardware interface for a low-speed device such as a USB-compatible keyboard, mouse, joystick, scanner, set of speakers, printer, broadband devices (DSL and cable modems), imaging devices, or storage devices. Devices are plugged directly in to a 4-pin socket on your computer or in to a multi-

port hub that plugs in to your computer. USB devices can be connected and disconnected while the computer is turned on, and they can also be daisy-chained together. UTP unshielded twisted pair Describes a type of cable used in most telephone networks and some computer networks. Pairs of unshielded wires are twisted to protect against electromagnetic interference, rather than relying on a metal sheath around each pair of wires to protect against interference. UXGA ultra extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1600 x 1200. V video controller The circuitry on a video card or on the system board (in computers with an integrated video controller) that provides the video capabilitiesin combination with the monitorfor your computer. video memory Memory that consists of memory chips dedicated to video functions. Video memory is usually faster than system memory. The amount of video memory installed primarily influences the number of colors that a program can display. video mode A mode that describes how text and graphics are displayed on a monitor. Graphics-based software, such as Windows operating systems, displays in video modes that can be defined as x horizontal pixels by y vertical pixels by z colors. Character-based software, such as text editors, displays in video modes that can be defined as x columns by y rows of characters. video resolution See resolution. virus A program that is designed to inconvenience you or to destroy data stored on your computer. A virus program moves from one computer to another through an infected disk, software downloaded from the Internet, or e-mail attachments. When an infected program starts, its embedded virus also starts. A common type of virus is a boot virus, which is stored in the boot sectors of a floppy disk. If the floppy disk is left in the drive when the computer is shut down and then Glossary 183 turned on, the computer is infected when it reads the boot sectors of the floppy disk expecting to find the operating system. If the computer is infected, the boot virus may replicate itself onto all the floppy disks that are read or written in that computer until the virus is eradicated. V volt The measurement of electric potential or electromotive force. One V appears across a resistance of 1 ohm when a current of 1 ampere flows through that resistance. W W watt The measurement of electrical power. One W is 1 ampere of current flowing at 1 volt. WHr watt-hour A unit of measure commonly used to indicate the approximate capacity of a battery. For example, a 66-WHr battery can supply 66 W of power for 1 hour or 33 W for 2 hours. wallpaper The background pattern or picture on the Windows desktop. Change your wallpaper through the Windows Control Panel. You can also scan in your favorite picture and make it wallpaper. WLAN wireless local area network. A series of interconnected computers that communicate with each other over the air waves using access points or wireless routers to provide Internet access. write-protected Files or media that cannot be changed. Use write-protection when you want to protect data from being changed or destroyed. To write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, slide its write-protect tab to the open position. WPAN wireless personal area network. A computer network used for communica-

tion among computer devices (including telephones and personal digital assistants) close to one person. WWAN wireless wide area network. A wireless high-speed data network using cellular technology and covering a much larger geographic area than WLAN. WXGA wide-aspect extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1280 x 800."

X XGA extended graphics array A video standard for video cards and controllers that supports resolutions up to 1024 x 768. 184 Glossary Z ZIF zero insertion force A type of socket or connector that allows a computer chip to be installed or removed with no stress applied to either the chip or its socket. Zip A popular data compression format. Files that have been compressed with the Zip format are called Zip files and usually have a filename extension of .zip. A special kind of zipped file is a self-extracting file, which has a filename extension of .exe. You can unzip a self-extracting file by double-clicking it. Zip drive A high-capacity floppy drive developed by Iomega Corporation that uses 3.5-inch removable disks called Zip disks. Zip disks are slightly larger than regular floppy disks, about twice as thick, and hold up to 100 MB of data. Glossary 185 186 Glossary Index Numerics b o o t s equ en c e , 1 6 2 8-in-1 memory card re ad er, 7 2 b r i gh tn e s s adjusting, 3 1 A aud i o c onn e c t o r s description, 2 2 aud i o d e v i c e connecting, 5 4 enabling, 6 8 audio. See s oun d B b a t t e r y charge gauge, 4 1 charging, 4 3 checking the charge, 4 0 performance, 3 9 power meter, 4 1 removing, 4 4 storing, 4 4 b lank c a rd s ExpressCards, 7 0 memory card, 7 3 removing, 7 1 , 7 4 C c a rn e t , 1 4 6 CD about, 5 0 blank, 5 1 CD-RW drive problems, 9 3 drive problems, 9 3 Check Disk, 9 4 c l e an in g touch pad, 1 6 5 c o in - c e l l b a t t e r y replacing, 1 3 8 c ompu t e r crashes, 1 0 3 - 1 0 4 restore to previous operating state, 1 1 8 slow performance, 9 5 , 1 0 6 specifications, 1 5 4 stops responding, 1 0 3 c onn e c t in g audio device, 5 4 B lu e t o o th w i re l e s s t e chn o l o g y Mobile Broadband network, 8 0 installing, 1 4 1 TV, 5 4 c on t a c t in g D e l l , 1 5 2 Index 187 c op y in g CD s d o cum en t a t i on general information, 5 0 End User License Agreement, 1 3 helpful tips, 5 2 ergonomics, 1 3 how to, 5 1 online, 1 6 c op y in g DVD s general information, 5 0 helpful tips, 5 2 how to, 5 1 D D el l contacting, 1 5 2 D e l l D i a gn o s t i c s about, 8 7 Product Information Guide, 1 3 regulatory, 1 3 safety, 1 3 warranty, 1 3 d r i v e r s about, 1 1 5 identifying, 1 1 5 reinstalling, 1 1 6 D r i v e r s and U t i l i t i e s m ed i a , 1 3 about, 1 1 6 Dell Diagnostics, 8 7 starting from the Drivers and d r i v e s Utilities media, 8 8 starting from your hard drive, 8 7 problems, 9 2 See hard drive D e l l M ed i aD i re c t problems, 1 0 4 D e l l supp o r t s i t e , 1 6 D e l lC onn e c t , 1 4 8 DVD about, 5 0 blank, 5 1 drive problems, 9 3 D e v i c e D r i v e r R o l lb a c k , 1 1 6 E d i a gn o s t i c s Dell, 8 7 d i sp l a y End U s e r L i c en s e A g re em en t , 1 3 e rg on om i c s in f o rm a t i on , 1 3 adjusting brightness, 3 1 adjusting the size of icons, 1 4 3 e r ro r m e s s a g e s , 9 6 adjusting the size of toolbars, 1 4 3 E xp re s sC a rd s , 6 9 description, 2 1 resolution, 3 2 switching the video image, 3 1 blanks, 7 0 - 7 1 installing, 7 0 removing, 7 1 slot, 2 3 188 Index F fan description, 2 3 H hard drive problems, 9 4 replacing, 1 2 5 returning to Dell, 1 2 8 hardware problems, 1 0 2 removing, 1 3 7 shortcuts, 3 4 ke yb o a rd s t a tu s l i gh t s description, 2 1 ke yp ad numeric, 3 3 L l ab e l s Dell Diagnostics, 8 7 Microsoft Windows, 1 5 H a rdw a re Troub l e sh o o t e r, 1 1 8 Service Tag, 1 5 l o s t c ompu t e r, 8 6 hinge cover description, 1 3 6 removing, 1 3 6 I i con s M m ed i a playing, 4 7 m ed i a c on t r o l bu t t on s adjusting the size, 1 4 3 Dell MediaDirect button, 5 3 IEEE 1 3 9 4 c onn e c t o r problems, 1 0 1 In t e rn e t c onn e c t i on about, 2 5 options, 2 5 setting up, 2 6 K description, 2 0 m ed i a m em o r y c a rd s , 7 2 installing, 7 3 types, 7 2 m em o ry installing, 1 2 8 removing, 1 2 9 m em o ry c ard blanks, 7 3 keyb o a rd m em o ry c a rd re ad er, 7 2 numeric keypad, 3 3 m em o ry c ard s Index 189 blanks, 7 4 removing, 7 4 messages error, 9 6 m i c r oph on e directional, 4 5 M in i -C a rd installing, 1 3 1 M ob i l e B r o adb and network connections, 8 0 See also wireless switch P ph on e numb e r s , 1 5 2 p ow e r line conditioners, 2 9 problems, 1 0 8 protection devices, 2 9 surge protectors, 2 9 UPS, 2 9 p ow e r bu t t on description, 2 1 pow e r l i gh t M ob i l e B r o adb and (WWAN ) conditions, 1 0 8 problems, 1 0 7 m od em installing, 1 3 1 m on i t o r. S e e d i s p l a y N n e tw o r k Mobile Broadband

(WWAN), 1 0 7 problems, 1 0 7 QuickSet, 1 4 3 O p ow e r m an a g em en t adjusting settings, 1 4 3 QuickSet, 1 4 3 p r in t e r cable, 2 8 connecting, 2 7 problems, 1 0 9 setting up, 2 7 USB, 2 8 p r ob l em s blue screen, 1 0 4 CD drive, 9 3 CD-RW drive, 9 3 computer crashes, 1 0 3 - 1 0 4 computer does not start up, 1 0 3 computer stops responding, 1 0 3 op e r a t in g s y s t em Dell Diagnostics, 8 7 reinstalling Windows Vista, 1 1 8 Dell MediaDirect, 1 0 4 drives, 9 2 DVD drive, 9 3 error messages, 9 6 190 Index hard drive, 9 4 rein s t a l l in g IEEE 1394 connector, 1 0 1 Windows Vista, 1 1 8 keyboard, 1 0 2 lockups, 1 0 3 network, 1 0 7 power, 1 0 8 res o lu t i on setting, 3 2 power light conditions, 1 0 8 S printer, 1 0 9 program crashes repeatedly, 1 0 4 S /PD IF d i g i t a l aud i o program stops responding, 1 0 4 enabling, 6 8 programs and Windows S a f e l y R emo v e H a rdw a re compatibility, 1 0 4 i c on , 1 0 1 restore computer to previous operating state, 1 1 8 safety instructions, 1 3 restore operating system to scanner previous state, 1 1 8 problems, 1 1 0 scanner, 1 1 0 screen. See d i s p l a y slow computer performance, 9 5 , 1 0 6 software, 1 0 3 - 1 0 5 s e cu r i t y c ab l e s l o t description, 2 3 sound and speakers, 1 1 1 Service Ta g, 15 speakers, 1 1 1 spyware, 9 5 , 1 0 6 s o f tw a re problems, 1 0 4 - 1 0 5 Produ c t In f o rm a t i on Gu id e , 1 3 s o f tw a re and h a rdw a re Q Qu i c kS e t , 1 4 3 in c omp a t ib i l i t i e s , 1 1 8 s ound problems, 1 1 1 volume, 1 1 1 Qu i c kS e t H e lp , 1 7 speakers R problems, 1 1 1 volume, 1 1 1 sp e c i f i c a t i on s , 1 5 4 RAM. S ee m em o r y sp yw a re , 9 5 , 1 0 6 re gu l a t o r y in f o rm a t i on , 1 3 s t o l en c ompu t e r, 8 6 Index 191 supp o r t tips, 1 4 6 contacting Dell, 1 5 2 t r oub l e sh o o t in g supp o r t w eb s i t e , 1 6 Dell Diagnostics, 8 7 S - v id e o TV- ou t c onn e c t o r connecting a TV, 2 3 description, 2 3 S y s t em R e s to re , 1 1 8 s y s t em s e tup p r o g r am commonly used options, 1 6 2 screens, 1 6 2 viewing, 1 6 2 T t a s kb a r Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, 1 0 7 Dell Support Utility, 1 7 QuickSet icon, 1 4 3 Safely Remove Hardware, 1 0 1 wireless activity indicator, 8 0 t e l ephon e numb e r s , 1 5 2 t o o lb a r s adjusting the size, 1 4 3 t ou ch p ad , 3 5 cleaning, 1 6 5 customizing, 3 6 Hardware Troubleshooter, 1 1 8 restore computer to previous operating state, 1 1 8 tu rn in g o f f y ou r c ompu t e r, 1 2 3 TV connecting, 5 4 U un in t e r rup t ib l e pow e r supp l y. UPS S e e UPS, 29 V v id e o problems, 1 1 3 v id e o c on t r o l l e r determining configuration, 1 9 v id e o c on t r o l l e r c on f i gu r a t i on determining what controller is installed, 1 9 v o lum e adjusting, 1 1 1 t r an s f e r r in g in fo rm a t ion to a n ew c ompu t e r, 2 7 t r a v e l in g w i th th e compu t e r W by air, 1 4 6 identification tag, 1 4 5 packing, 1 4 5 192 Index w a r r an t y in f o rm a t i on , 1 3 Window s E a s y Tr an s f e r w i z a rd , 2 7 Wind ow s Vi s t a Device Driver Rollback, 1 1 6 Program Compatibility wizard, 1 0 4 reinstalling, 1 1 8 System Restore, 1 1 8 Windows Easy Transfer wizard, 2 7 w i re l e s s turning activity on and off, 1 4 3 w i z a rd s Program Compatibility wizard, 1 0 4 Windows Easy Transfer, 2 7 WWAN See also Mobile Broadband Index 193 194 Index

FCC Statements to be included in the Users Guide for Dell Siberia USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, unless authorized by FCC.

Contents: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Broadcom 802.11g WLAN PCI-E Mini Card User's Guide Introduction Completing the Setup Utility Functions Regulatory Information Company Copyright Statement Company Trademark Statement. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks owned by Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. WLCARD-UG200-D2 01.30.03 file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/index.htm [1/30/03 10:11:15 PM]

Introduction: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Introduction: BCM94311MCG Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Solution Using the Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Features and Requirements Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Solution The Broadcom 802.11g WLAN solution accesses wireless local area networks (LANs), enables the sharing of a local printer and files with others in the network, accesses the Internet, and enables roaming about the officewire-free. This wireless LAN solution is designed for both the home user and small businessesand it is scalable so that users can be added and new network features can be enabled as networking needs grow. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in IEEE Std 802.11, 1999 Edition) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network being connecting to has enabled WEP, WEP must also be enabled in the network profile and the WEP key must be set to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, it is impossible to connect to the network. The Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook makes a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated on the following figure. Networks 1 and 2 are infrastructure type of networks. The two notebook computers connected by radio waves form an ad hoc type of network. Enterprise Users file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (1 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]

Introduction: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Obtain the following information from the network administrator:

l Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks to connect to l WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks to connect to l For Microsoft Windows networking, the customer name and workgroup name l For a network account, a user name and password l An IP address (if not using a DHCP server) Home Users The access point (AP) that communicates with the Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook has a preassigned network name

(SSID) that the notebook recognizes upon startup. To enable WEP, use any string of numbers for the WEP key. Upon startup, the Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook detects certain wireless networks (WLANs) that are within range. Before connecting to these and other wireless networks, configure a profile for each network.See Completing the setup. Using the Broadcom 802.11g WLAN The Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook is an IEEE 802.11g based wireless LAN device. A LAN is composed of two or more computers that are connected to each other to share files or common equipment such as a printer or an Internet connection. A wireless LAN provides the same functionality of a wired network, but it eliminates the need to install networking cables and other networking equipment. Not only is a wireless LAN easier to deploy, but it also allows for roaming. For example, when using the WLAN enabled notebook, it is possible to roam from a conference room to an office without being disconnected from the network. Features and Requirements An IEEE 802.11 based wireless LAN includes the following features:

l Support for IEEE 802.11g draft specification l Support for IEEE 802.11b standard l 2.4-GHz band operation l Network data rate of up to 54 Mbit/s l Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption The following items are needed for participating in a wireless LAN:

l Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook computer running on a Microsoft Windows XP operating system l Software compact disc containing the drivers, software reference guide, and Help file The Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook works with any Wi-Fi CERTIFIED base station or wireless client adapter. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (2 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]

Introduction: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to top Back to Contents Ccopyright and Trademark Information. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (3 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Completing the Setup: Broadcom 802.11g WLAN User Manual NOTEBefore starting, obtain the required network information from the network administrator or the wireless access point installer (see The Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Solution in Introduction). Modes of Operation Configuring a Network Profile Modes of Operation A wireless LAN can be configured for two different modes of operation: infrastructure network and computer-to-computer

(ad hoc) network. Whereas each mode has its advantages, one mode may be more appropriate than the other, depending on the location and type of network connection. Infrastructure Mode The key difference between the infrastructure type of network and an ad hoc network is that the infrastructure network includes a base station (host) computer that has a built-in wireless network adapter and is connected to a wireless access point (AP). This functionality allows computers on the infrastructure wireless LAN to access the resources and tools of the wired LAN, including Internet access, e-mail, file transfers, and printer sharing. Characteristics Networked computers communicate with each other through a dedicated AP. All data transmitted between the computers on this wireless LAN passes through the AP. Advantages l Extended range. The access point extends the range of the wireless LAN. Each computer can communicate with other computers equipped by wireless networks that are within the range of the access point. l Roaming. As the user moves around the home or office, the Company 54g enabled notebook determines the best access point to use to ensure continuous communication with the network. l Network connectivity. An access point can provide wireless LAN access to an existing wired network by bridging the two networks together. This gives users of the wireless LAN access to all the functions of a wired networkfrom file server access to e-mail and the Internet. Disadvantages Because the infrastructure mode offers more features, it requires additional components and setup time to deploy. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (1 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Requirements A base station computer having a wired connection to the Internet, a wireless network adapter, and a connection to an AP. Computer-to-Computer Mode A peer-to-peer (ad hoc) network is the easiest to deploy and is ideal for home use or in small offices. This mode allows the sharing of files with other employees, printing to a shared office printer, and access to the Internet through a shared modem. With ad hoc networking, however, the computer is only able to communicate with other wireless networks that are within a certain range and are in the same wireless workgroup. Characteristics Networked computers send data directly to each other. Advantages l Simple setup l Cost efficiency Disadvantages Communication is limited to those who are located within a certain range. Configuring a Network Profile To connect to a wireless network, a network profile for that network must be configured on the Company 54g enabled notebook. If the Company 54g enabled notebook computer came with the Company 54g WLAN card already installed and set up at the factory, follow the network profile configuration instructions provided below. NOTEFor more information on how to configure a network profile and IEEE 802.1x authentication, click Learn about setting up wireless network configuration at the bottom of the Wireless Networks tab of Wireless Network Connection Properties. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection you want to configure by doing the following. 1. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (2 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Click the Wireless Networks tab. You can configure a network profile for networks that are listed under Available networks as well as those that are not listed. When you have completed configuring a network profile, the network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. The computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list. Follow the applicable instruction set below, based on whether or not the network is listed and whether or not the network requires a WEP key (check with your network administrator to see if a WEP key is required). NOTEBoth the network name and the network key are case-sensitive. l Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key l Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP key l Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key l Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (3 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (4 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (5 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 5. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (6 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (7 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 5. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 6. Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 7. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (8 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 8. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (9 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (10 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 5. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (11 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 6. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that network. If the Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (12 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (13 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box and again in the Confirm network key box. 5. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 6. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 7. Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 8. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (14 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 9. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Back to top Back to Contents Copyright and Trademark Information. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (15 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Running Utility Functions Adding a New Network to the List of Preferred Networks Viewing or Modifying the Wireless Network Properties Setting Up an Ad Hoc (Peer-to-Peer) Group Network for Connecting to the Internet Adding an Ad Hoc Network Disabling the Radio Running Utility Functions The utility functions and details for the wireless network connection are available in Control Panel. These functions include Disabling the network device, Renaming the connection, View status of this connection, and Change settings of this connection. Changing Settings 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Click Wireless Network Connections, and then click Change settings of this connection. l Click the Wireless Network tab to configure available networks, add and remove networks, and change network properties. l Click the General tab, then click Configure m To change the properties of the network adapter, click the Advanced tab. m To view details about the driver files, update the driver for the device, roll back to the previous driver, or to uninstall the driver, click the Driver tab. m To view resource settings, click the Resources tab. m To change power management settings, click the Power Management tab. The Advanced tab in Network Adapter Properties lists the properties for the Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) adapter. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (1 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual l IBSS Channel Number selects the independent basic service set (IBSS) channel number on which to operate. The Company 54g enabled notebook comes preset for use on channels 111. This setting is acceptable in most countries. Some countries allow use on more channels. If you travel to a country that allows the use of other channels, change the IBSS Channel Number to that number. l Locale selects the adapter properties that comply with the operating regulations for that locale. The Locale settings include USA, Israel, Japan, Jordan, Thailand, and Worldwide. This wireless LAN device is normally preset by default for the country in which the device is sold. Before operating this WLAN device, verify that the locale selection is correct by following the steps described in Changing Settings above. On the Advanced tab of HP WLAN 54g W450 Network Adapter Properties, m Click Locale m In the Value list, select the appropriate regional location If you travel to other countries with the Company 54g enabled notebook, follow the same steps to change the locale setting to match the destination country. Reset the locale setting back to the appropriate home setting after returning. If the destination country is not listed, change the Locale setting to Worldwide. l Radio Enable/Disable allows you to turn the radio on or off as necessary to comply with restrictions prohibiting the emission of radio signals, such as during takeoff and landing onboard a commercial aircraft. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (2 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual l Rate sets the transmission rate. The default setting is Use best rate. This automatically adjusts the data rate to the optimal rate based on the capabilities of the other clients and access points. The default values for the properties listed below are set for maximum performance. Therefore, It is not recommended for home users to change the settings for any of these properties. Only network administrators or persons having technical wireless LAN experience should attempt to change any of the settings. frames. available:

adapter. l Fragmentation Threshold is the threshold at which the IEEE 802.11 adapter break the packet into multiple l IBSS 54g (TM) Mode is used to set the connection type in an ad hoc network. The following options are m 54g - 802.11b compatible links at the best rate with an IEEE 802.11b and an IEEE 802.11g network m 54g - Performance links only with IEEE 802.11g networks at the highest rate. In addition it excludes m 802.11b Mode links only with IEEE 802.11b networks at the highest rate. In addition it excludes IEEE

(recommended setting). IEEE 802.11b networks. 802.11g networks. l Locally Administered MAC Address is used to override the MAC address of the Company 54g Wireless LAN l PLCP Header is used to set the header type used for CCK rates. Can be long, auto (short/long). l Power Output is used for putting out a percentage of the maximum output power. l Power Save Mode is used to put the Company 54g enabled notebook into the IEEE 802.11 Power Save mode. In Power Save mode, the radio is periodically powered down to conserve power. When in Power Save mode, packets are stored in the AP until the STA comes on. Adding a New Network to the List of Preferred Networks If the Company 54g enabled notebook is running at a location in which a wireless LAN is operating, and it is within range of the access point, the computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list under Preferred networks. A network profile must be configured for each network to add to the list To add a new network to the list of preferred networks, first check to see if the new network is listed on the Wireless Networks tab under Available networks. If it is, follow the applicable instructions below according to which operating system your computer is running and whether or not the network requires a WEP key. NOTESee the network administrator or the wireless access point installer to obtain a WEP key, as necessary. l See Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key in Completing the Setup l See Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key in Completing the Setup. If the network being added to the Preferred networks list is not listed in the Available networks list, follow the applicable instructions below according to which operating system the computer is running and whether or not the network requires a WEP key. l See Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key in Completing the Setup l See Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key in Completing the Setup. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (3 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Viewing or Modifying the Wireless Network Properties 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 4. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. 5. Under Preferred networks click the network name and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (4 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual It is possible to enable or disable WEP data encryption and change the network name and the network key (see Completing the setup for instructions). Setting Up an Ad Hoc (Peer-to-Peer) Group Network for Connecting to the Internet To connect the computers in an ad hoc group network to the Internet, the Windows Internet connection sharing (ICS) component must be installed. ICS installation is not required, however, for communication among a group of computers that have a Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) installed in each computer. An ad hoc network must be added under Preferred networks. See Running Utility Functions. Select a desktop computer to serve as the host computer; all other computers are called clients. The host computer must be running the Windows XP operating system. The host computer is the only computer that connects directly to the Internet. Company recommends using the desktop computer having the fastest microprocessor and the most memory as the host computer. NOTEInternet connection sharing requires that the host computer have either a modem or another network adapter in addition to a wireless network adapter. The modem or the additional network adapter is used to access the Internet. The file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (5 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Company 54g enabled notebook is used to share the Internet connections with other clients. Setting Up Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) on the Host Computer 1. Connect the host computer to the Internet. 2. From the host computer Start menu, select Help and Support. 3. Perform a search on Internet Connection Sharing. 4. From the Pick a task list, select Enable Internet Connection Sharing on a Network Connection. 5. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete setting up ICS

. Adding an Ad Hoc Network An ad hoc network (for peer-to-peer communicating) can either require a WEP key or not. Instructions for adding and configuring an ad hoc network for both types of ad hoc networks are provided below:

l Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key l Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Requires a WEP Key Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (6 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (7 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 5. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 6. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used box. 7. Clear the Data encryption (WEP enabled) and the The Key is provided for me automatically boxes if they are selected. 8. Click OK. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (8 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 9. Click Advanced. 10. Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only, and click Close. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (9 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 11. Click OK. The added ad hoc network appears at the top of the list under Preferred networks. 12. To verify that the computer is connected to the added ad hoc network, reopen the Network Properties window and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the added network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for the ad hoc network. Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Requires a WEP Key 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (10 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. 5. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (11 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 6. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 7. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box and again in the Confirm network key box. 8. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 9. Type the network key in the Network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 10. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used box. 11. Click OK. 12. Click Advanced file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (12 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 13. Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only, and click Close. 14. Click OK. The added ad hoc network appears at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (13 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 15. To verify that the computer is connected to the added ad hoc network, reopen the Network Properties window and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the added network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for that network. Disabling the Radio l To disable the radio on the Company 54g enabled notebook, right-click the wireless network connection icon in the system tray and click Disable. Back to top Back to Contents Copyright and Trademark Information file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (14 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Back to Contents Regulatory Information Operational Information Regulatory Information Operational Information Wireless Interoperability The Integrated 802.11g enabled notebook is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) and orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

l IEEE Std 802.11b-1999. Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN l IEEE Std 802.11g-2002. Draft standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN Safety The Integrated 802.11g enabled notebook, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this devices, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Integrated 802.11g enabled notebook operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of a Integrated 802.11g enabled notebook may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:

l Using the Integrated 802.11g enabled notebook onboard airplanes, or l Using the Integrated 802.11g enabled notebook in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airplane, for example), ask for authorization to use the Integrated 802.11g enabled notebook before turning it on. Regulatory Statements for BCM94311MCG USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canada Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. The term "IC" before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Pour empecher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit etre utilize a l'interieur et devrait etre place loin des fenetres afin de Fournier un ecram de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'emission) est installe a l'exterieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity and Restrictions Hereby, Broadcom Corp, declares that this equipment complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. This equipment is marked with the community. 0984 symbol and can be used throughout the European This indicates compliance with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC and meets the relevant parts of following technical specifications:

EN 300 328 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission Systems;

Data transmission equipment operating in the 2,4GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques;

Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive. EN 301 489-17 - Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17 Specific Conditions for Wideband Data and HIPERLAN Equipment. EN 60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment. EN 50385 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the basic restrictions or the reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields. Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. France - 2.4GHz for Metropolitan France :

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power

(EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Taiwan DGT warning statement Translation:

Article 14 Without permission granted, the frequency change, transmitting power enhance or alter of original design characteristic as well as function by company, enterprise, or user for approved Low-power radio frequency devices is not allowed. Article 17 Low-power radio-frequency devices shall not influence aircraft security and interfere legal communications; If found, shall cease operating immediately until no interference is achieved. Above mentioned Legal Communications is defined as radio communications operation follows Telecommunications Act. Low-power radio-frequency devices must susceptible with the interference from legal communications, ISM radio wave radiated devices.

EUT External Photos For the Hewlett Packard Company Optimator Model: HSTNN-W26C (KEDRON AGN, KEDRON AG, HOYAS, BEVO, and REDSTORM) DATE: 06/19/2007 Bluetooth Qualification Test Facility

(BQTF) IC recognized

#

3925 CETECOM Inc. 411 Dixon Landing Road Milpitas, CA 95035 U.S.A. Phone: + 1 (408) 586 6200 Fax: + 1 (408) 586 6299 E-mail: info@cetecomusa.com http://www.cetecom.com CETECOM Inc. is a Delaware Corporation with Corporation number: 2113686 Board of Directors: Dr. Harald Ansorge, Dr. Klaus Matkey, Hans Peter May Copyright by CETECOM Table of Content 1 2 ASSESSMENT.................................................................................................................................... 3 EUT EXTERNAL PHOTOS.............................................................................................................. 4 EUT TOP VIEW ............................................................................................................................. 4 EUT BOTTOM VIEW...................................................................................................................... 5 BATTERY AND BATTERY COMPARTMENT ..................................................................................... 6 EUT FRONT VIEW......................................................................................................................... 7 EUT BACK VIEW .......................................................................................................................... 8 EUT RIGHT SIDE VIEW.................................................................................................................. 9 EUT LEFT SIDE VIEW.................................................................................................................. 10 EUT USER VIEW ......................................................................................................................... 11 EUT USER VIEW WITH WWAN ANTENNA EXTENDED ................................................................ 12 EXTERNAL WWAN ANTENNA................................................................................................... 13 EUT USER VIEW TABLET ......................................................................................................... 14 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 1 Assessment The following is in compliance with the applicable criteria specified in FCC rules Parts 2, 15 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations and in compliance with the applicable criteria specified in Industry Canada rules RSS210. Company Description Model #

Hewlett Packard Notebook PC HSTNN-W26C Date:2007-6-15 Name: Peter Mu Title: Project Engineer Company: Cetecom Inc. Address: 411 Dixon Landing Rd, Milpitas, CA 95035, USA Phone: +1 408 586 6221 Email: peter.mu@cetecomusa.com 2 EUT External Photos 2.1 EUT top view 2.2 EUT bottom view 2.3 Battery and battery compartment 2.4 EUT front view 2.5 EUT back view 2.6 EUT right side view 2.7 EUT left side view 2.8 EUT user view 2.9 EUT user view with WWAN antenna extended 2.10 External WWAN Antenna 2.11 EUT user view tablet

PROPOSED ID LABEL AND LOCATION BROADCOM CORPORATION FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 IC: 4324A-BRCM1020 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including that may cause undesired operation. interference ID LABEL LOCATION PROPOSED FCC ID LABEL FOR HOST DEVICE THIS DEVICE CONTAINS FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020

BCM94311MCG System label System label location: On the back of the notebook PC. Contains Broadcom radio

BCM94311MCG & MCAG FCC Portable update (Parke, Spears and Hawke) No. Antenna Antenna type Antenna model Manufacturer Acon Stamped metal sheet Amphenol AMP6P-700000 Stamped metal sheet WT0541-22-003 Stamped metal sheet Stamped metal sheet APP8P-700001 APM6P-7000026 81.EG515.001/003 Stamped metal sheet Stamped metal sheet AMP8P-700036/700002 81.EG615.001/003 1 2 1 2 3 4 Acon WNC Acon WNC Peak Gain 2.4GHz/dBi Peak Gain 5GHz/dBi BRCM Internal referece Main 1.0 (V); 2.6 (H+V) Aux -2.4 (H); 0.2 (H+V) Main -2.5 (H); -1.3(H+V) Aux -0.5 (H); 0.7 (H+V) Main 0.8 (H); 1.88 (H+V) Aux -0.43 (V); 1.81 (H+V) Main 0.1 (H) Main 2.3 (H+V) Main 0.16 (H) Main 2.24 (H+V) Main 2.05 (V); 3.21 (H+V). Aux 1.72 (H); 2.58 (H+V) Aux -0.2 (H) Aux 0.1 (H+V) Main 0.61 (H) main 1.89 (H+V) Parker Parker Hawke Hawke Aux 2.0 (V) Aux 3.12 (H+V) Main -0.83 (V) Main 0.44 (H+V) Main 0.8 (H); 1.88 (H+V);

Aux -1 (H); -0.4 (H+V) Main 0.67 (H) Main 2.12 (H+V) Spears Combo Spears Combo

Antenna Regulatory Information

Product type

Model number

Revision

WLAN antenna

Hawke

Rev. 1

Manufacturer Part No. : Main / Aux

APP8P-700001/APM6P-700026/

/ MIMO

APM6P-700027

Dell Part No. : Main / Aux / MIMO

ADVANCED-CONNECTEK INC. B1,No. 205, Sec.3, Bei-Hsin Rd., Hsin-Tien Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C TEL886-2-8913-1939 FAX886-2-8913-2538 Http//www.acon.com Template Revision 062007 1 1. Specifications Antenna Specifications Antenna Type (Material, Technology) PIFA Antenna Model Number Hawke Operating Frequency Range(s) 2.4GHz ~ 2.5GHz and 4.9GHz ~ 5.9GHz Peak Gain (802.11b/g / 2.4GHz Band)

(dBi) Main -1.6 / Aux 0.04 / MIMO 1.67 Peak Gain (802.11a / 5GHz Band) (dBi) Main -1.35 / Aux 0.10 / MIMO 1.09 Radio Connector Type IPEX 20278-111R-13 Mid-Line Connector Type (If Applicable) N/A Remark: Peak Gains include all system losses (connector, cable, etc) Cable Specifications Cable Parameters Main Base Side LCD Side Total LCD Side Total LCD Side Aux Base Side MIMO Base Side Total Length (mm) N/A N/A 625 N/A N/A 505 N/A N/A 390 Connectors) (dB, 1.8 / 2.6 1.5 / 2.2 1.1 / 1.5 Loss (Including 2.4GHz / 5GHz) Color: White Color: Black Color: Gray Description (Color, OD: 1.13 mm (low loss) OD: 1.13 mm (low loss) OD: 1.13 mm (low loss) Diameter, Manufacturer) Vendor:

Vendor:

Vendor:

Kurabe/Hitachi/Sumitomo Kurabe/Hitachi/Sumitomo Kurabe/Hitachi/Sumitomo 2 2. Antenna Assembly Main Antenna Aux Antenna MIMO Antenna 3. Antenna Assembly Installed in The Notebook Main Antenna Aux Antenna MIMO Antenna 3 4. Mechanical Drawing of Antennas 4 5 6 5. Gain Patterns

- Main Antenna Fre. = 2412 MHz Fre. = 2437 MHz Fre. = 2462 MHz Fre. = 4900 MHz Fre. = 5150 MHz Fre. = 5350 MHz 7 Fre. = 5470 MHz Fre. = 5725 MHz Fre. = 5875 MHz

- Aux Antenna Fre. = 2412 MHz Fre. = 2437 MHz Fre. = 2462 MHz 8 Fre. = 4900 MHz Fre. = 5150 MHz Fre. = 5350 MHz Fre. = 5470 MHz Fre. = 5725 MHz Fre. = 5875 MHz 9

- MIMO Antenna Fre. = 2412 MHz Fre. = 2437 MHz Fre. = 2462 MHz Fre. = 4900 MHz Fre. = 5150 MHz Fre. = 5350 MHz 10 Fre. = 5470 MHz Fre. = 5725 MHz Fre. = 5875 MHz 11

Antenna Regulatory Information

Product type

Model number

Revision

WLAN antenna

Parker

Rev. 1

Manufacturer Part No. : Main / Aux /

AMP8P-700023 (MIMO) MIMO

AMP6P-700000 (Main &Aux)

Dell Part No. : Main / Aux / MIMO

ADVANCED-CONNECTEK INC. B1,No. 205, Sec.3, Bei-Hsin Rd., Hsin-Tien Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C TEL886-2-8913-1939 FAX886-2-8913-2538 Http//www.acon.com Template Revision 083106 1 1. Specifications Antenna Specifications Antenna Type (Material, Technology) PIFA Antenna Model Number Parker Operating Frequency Range(s) 2.4GHz ~ 2.5GHz and 4.9GHz ~ 5.9GHz Peak Gain (802.11b/g / 2.4GHz Band)

(dBi) Main 1/ Aux -2.4/ MIMO 0.6 Peak Gain (802.11a / 5GHz Band) (dBi) Main -2.1/ Aux-0.5/ MIMO 0.5 Radio Connector Type IPEX 20278-111R-13 Mid-Line Connector Type (If Applicable) N/A Remark: Peak Gains include all system losses (connector, cable, etc) Cable Specifications Cable Parameters Main Base Side LCD Side Total LCD Side Total LCD Side Aux Base Side MIMO Base Side Total Length (mm) N/A N/A 497 N/A N/A 537 N/A N/A 493 Connectors) (dB, 1.5 / 2.3 1.2 / 1.8 0.5 / 0.8 Loss (Including 2.4GHz / 5GHz) Color: White Color: Black Color: Gray Description (Color, OD: 1.13 mm(low loss) OD:1.13 mm(low loss) OD: 1.13mm(low loss) Diameter, Manufacturer) Vendor:

Vendor:

Vendor:

Kurabe/Hitachi/Sumitomo Kurabe/Hitachi/Sumitomo Kurabe/Hitachi/Sumitomo 2 2. Antenna Assembly Main/Aux Antenna MIMO Antenna 3. Antenna Assembly Installed in The Notebook MIMO AUX Main 3 4. Mechanical Drawing of Antennas 4 5 5. Gain Patterns

- Main Antenna H-pol. V-pol. H+V Fre. = 2412 MHz Fre. = 2437 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-5.9 dBi H-pol. (Aver.)

-5.7 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-3.0 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-1.8 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-7.4 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-6.7dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-2.3dBi H+V (Aver.)

-3.6 dBi H+V (Max.)

-0.2 dBi Fre. = 2462 MHz V-pol. (Max.)

-0.3 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-3.1dBi H+V (Max.) 2.1 dBi Fre. = 4900 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-5.6 dBi H-pol. (Aver.)

-2.1 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-0.8dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-6.7dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-6.0 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-2.2 dBi V-pol. (Max.) 1.0dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-8.4 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-2.8 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-4.4dBi H+V (Max.) 2.6 dBi H+V (Max.) 6

-0.6dBi H-pol. V-pol. H+V Fre. = 5150 MHz Fre. = 5350 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-7.5 dBi H-pol. (Aver.)

-7.9 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-2.8 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-3.9 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-8.3 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-8.3 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-3.1 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-3.5 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-4.9 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-5.1 dBi H+V (Max.)

-2.1 dBi H+V (Max.)

-2.9 dBi Fre. = 5470 MHz Fre. = 5725 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-8.4 dBi H-pol. (Aver.)

-7.6 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-4.5 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-3.1 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-9.3 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-8.7 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-3.1 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-2.5 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-5.8 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-5.1 dBi H+V (Max.)

-2.6 dBi H+V (Max.)

-1.3 dBi 7 H-pol. V-pol. H+V Fre. = 5875 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-7.4dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-2.8 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-7.3 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-2.2 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-4.3 dBi H+V (Max.)

-1.0 dBi

- Aux Antenna Fre. = 2412 MHz Fre. = 2437 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-6.5 dBi H-pol. (Aver.)

-6.0 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-3.5 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-3.2 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-10.0 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-9.4 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-5.3 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-5.4 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-4.9 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-4.4 dBi H+V (Max.)

-2.1 dBi H+V (Max.)

-1.9 dBi 8 H-pol. V-pol. H+V Fre. = 2462 MHz Fre. = 4900 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-6.0 dBi H-pol. (Aver.)

-6.2 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-2.4 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-0.5 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-8.5 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-6.6 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-2.6 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-1.3 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-4.1dBi H+V (Aver.)

-3.4 dBi H+V (Max.) 0.2 dBi H+V (Max.) 0.7 dBi Fre. = 5150 MHz Fre. = 5350 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-8.1 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-2.9 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-8.0 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-1.7 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-5.0 dBi H+V (Max.)

-1.0 dBi H-pol. (Aver.)

-7.8 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-3.1 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-7.6 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-2.5 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-4.7 dBi H+V (Max.)

-1.4 dBi 9 H-pol. V-pol. H+V Fre. = 5470 MHz Fre. = 5725 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-7.2 dBi H-pol. (Aver.)

-8.4 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-0.6 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-3.0 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-7.0 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-8.1 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-2.3 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-3.8 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-4.1 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-5.2 dBi H+V (Max.) 0.2 dBi H+V (Max.)

-2.4 dBi Fre. = 5875 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-8.6 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-3.1 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-7.4 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-2.9 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-4.9 dBi H+V (Max.)

-1.4 dBi 10

- MIMO Antenna H-pol. V-pol. H+V Fre. = 2412 MHz Fre. = 2437 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-5 dBi H-pol. (Aver.)

-4.7 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-1.5 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-1.3 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-7.2 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-0.2dBi H+V (Aver.)

-2.9 dBi H+V (Max.) 1.1 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-6.3 dBi V-pol. (Max.) 0.6 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-2.4 dBi H+V (Max.) 1.6 dBi Fre. = 2462 MHz Fre. = 4900 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-4.8dBi H-pol. (Aver.)

-7.4 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-1.3 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-2.2 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-6.5 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-8.3 dBi V-pol. (Max.) 0.4 dBi V-pol. (Max.) 0 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-2.5 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-4.8 dBi H+V (Max.) 1.4 dBi H+V (Max.) 0.1dBi 11 H-pol. V-pol. H+V Fre. = 5150 MHz Fre. = 5350 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-8.1 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-3.3 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-8.6 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-1.2 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-5.3 dBi H+V (Max.)

-0.5 dBi H-pol. (Aver.)

-7.9 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-2 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-6.9 dBi V-pol. (Max.) 0.5 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-4.4 dBi H+V (Max.) 0.8 dBi Fre. = 5470 MHz Fre. = 5725 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-7.6 dBi H-pol. (Aver.)

-8.2 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-3.4 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-3.2 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-6.8 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-8.4 dBi V-pol. (Max.) 0.1 dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-1.5 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-4.2dBi H+V (Aver.)

-5.3 dBi H+V (Max.) 0.3 dBi H+V (Max.)

-1.5 dBi 12 H-pol. V-pol. H+V Fre. = 5875 MHz H-pol. (Aver.)

-8.3 dBi H-pol. (Max.)

-3 dBi V-pol (Aver.)

-7.9dBi V-pol. (Max.)

-0.9 dBi H+V (Aver.)

-5.1 dBi H+V (Max.)

-0.9 dBi 13

Antenna Regulatory Information

Product type

Model number

Revision Aux / MIMO MIMO

Manufacturer Part No. : Main /

Dell Part No. : Main / Aux /

WLAN antenna

DELL Parker (WT0541-22-000)

A01

WT0541-22-002 ( for MIMO)

WT0541-22-003 ( for Main and Aux) Amphenol Shanghai Amphenol Airwave Communication Electronics Co., LTD No.689 Shennan Road, Minhang 201108, Shang-hai, China 1 1. Specifications Antenna Specifications Antenna Type (Material, Technology) Flex, Inverted-F Antenna (IFA) Antenna Model Number DELL Parker Operating Frequency Range(s) 2.4GHz ~ 2.5GHz and 4.9GHz ~ 5.9GHz Peak Gain (802.11b/g / 2.4GHz Band) 0.8 dBi

(dBi) Peak Gain (802.11a / 5GHz Band) (dBi) 2.52 dBi Radio Connector Type IPEX 20278-111R-13 or equivalent connector Mid-Line Connector Type (If Applicable) N/A Remark: Peak Gains include all system losses (connector, cable, etc) Cable Specifications Cable Parameters MIMO Base Side LCD Side Total LCD Side Total LCD Side Aux Base Side Main Base Side Total Length (mm) N/A N/A 492 N/A N/A 460 N/A N/A 537 Connectors) (dB, 1.3/2.1 1.2/ 1.9 1.2 / 1.9 Loss (Including 2.4GHz / 5GHz) Description (Color, Diameter, Manufacturer) Color: Gray OD: 1.13 mm Color: Black OD: 1.13 mm Color: White OD: 1.13 mm Vendor: GBE Vendor: GBE Vendor: GBE 2 2. Antenna Assembly Main/ Aux WLAN MIMO 3. Antenna Assembly Installed in The Notebook MIMO Aux WLAN Main WLAN 3 4. Mechanical Drawing of Antennas

(1) MIMO WLAN cable Upper Left Antenna

(2) Auxiliary WLAN cable Upper Right Antenna

(3) MAIN WLAN cable Upper Right Antenna 4 5. Gain Patterms

- MIMO Antenna 5

- Aux Antenna 6

- Main Antenna 7

Date: September 5, 2007 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020, originally granted on 11/30/2005. The major changes filed under this application are:

Applicant: Broadcom Corporation 1. Add a portable platform, Dell PP12S, PP29L and PP28L. 2. Add co-location with Bluetooth, FCC ID: PIWW360BT. 3. Add co-location with Bluetooth, BCM92045MD (FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1021). EMC testing was performed to ensure continued compliance. SAR testing was performed with the mentioned platform to demonstrate RF compliance. The antennas used on Dell PP12S, PP29L and PP28L, are the same type as WNC, 81.ED415.002, which is already certified in previous filing for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020, and has a lower gain. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

Antenna Regulatory Information

Product type

Model number

Revision

WLAN antenna

Spears

Rev. 1

Manufacturer Part No. : Main / Aux

AMP8P-700036 (Main)

APP8P-700002 (Aux)

Dell Part No. : Main / Aux / MIMO

ADVANCED-CONNECTEK INC. B1,No. 205, Sec.3, Bei-Hsin Rd., Hsin-Tien Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C TEL886-2-8913-1939 FAX886-2-8913-2538 Http//www.acon.com Template Revision 062007 1 1. Specifications Antenna Specifications Antenna Type (Material, Technology) PIFA Antenna Model Number Spears Operating Frequency Range(s) 2.4GHz ~ 2.5GHz and 4.9GHz ~ 5.9GHz Peak Gain (802.11b/g / 2.4GHz Band) Main / Aux -0.31 / 3.12

(dBi) Peak Gain (802.11a / 5GHz Band) (dBi) Main / Aux 0.82 / -0.35 Radio Connector Type 20531-111R-37 Mid-Line Connector Type (If Applicable) N/A Remark: Peak Gains include all system losses (connector, cable, etc) Cable Specifications Cable Parameters Main Base Side LCD Side Total LCD Side Aux Base Side Total Length (mm) N/A N/A 726 N/A N/A 398 Connectors) (dB, 1.3 / 2.3 1.2 / 2.0 Loss (Including 2.4GHz / 5GHz) Color: White Description (Color, OD: 1.37mm Diameter, Manufacturer) Vendor:

Color: Black OD: 1.37mm Vendor:

Kurabe/Hitachi/Sumitomo Kurabe/Hitachi/Sumitomo 2 2. Antenna Assembly Main Antenna Aux Antenna 3. Antenna Assembly Installed in The Notebook Main Antenna Aux Antenna 3 4. Mechanical Drawing of Antennas 4 5 5. Gain Patterns

- Main Antenna Fre. = 2412 MHz Fre. = 2437 MHz Fre. = 2462 MHz Fre. = 4900 MHz Fre. = 5150 MHz Fre. = 5350 MHz 6 Fre. = 5470 MHz Fre. = 5725 MHz Fre. = 5875 MHz

- Aux Antenna Fre. = 2412 MHz Fre. = 2437 MHz Fre. = 2462 MHz 7 Fre. = 4900 MHz Fre. = 5150 MHz Fre. = 5350 MHz Fre. = 5470 MHz Fre. = 5725 MHz Fre. = 5875 MHz 8

Cetecom, Inc. 411 Dixon Landing Road Milpitas, CA 95035 CETECOM ICT Services GmbH Untertuerkheimer Str. 6-10 66117 Saarbruecken, Germany To Whom It May Concern:

FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 For models PP28L (Hawke) and PP29L (Spears) the EMC and SAR reports are:

EMC_BROAD_041_07001_G_15.247.pdf BROAD_041_07001_SAR_Howke.pdf BROAD_041_07001_SAR_Spears.pdf For Model PP12S (Parker) the EMC and SAR reports are:

EMC_BROAD_038_07001_G_DTS.pdf BROAD_038_07001_SAR_BCM94311MCG.pdf Regards, Juan Martinez EMC Project Engineer

2 Fax: (02) 2268-6238 HON HAI PRECISION IND. CO., LTD. 2 TZU YU STREET, TU-CHENG CITY TAIPEI HSIEN, TAIWAN 236, R.O.C. Tel: (02) 2268-3466

: NVR3086B8683 RECEIPT DATE :2006/8/29 TEST DATE : 2006/8/29 PART DESCRIPTION

: ACER BEAGLE ANTENNA PART NUMBER

: N/A SAMPLE ID. TEST ITEM

: Sample1

: 1.VSWR 2. Antenna Gain TEST METHOD

: N/A PRE-CONDITION OPERATOR

: N/A

: 9904 TEST CONDITION

: VSWR Test @2~3GHz, number of points=201, IF bandwidth=300Hz AMBIENT CONDITION

: Temperature: 23.5 C Relative Humidity: 53.5%

TEST EQUIPMENT

Last Cal.: [

Due: [

: 988-0003 2005/9/9 2006/9/8 Result:

SET UP 1 90o 270o 180o 0o PAGE 2 OF 11 FT3A10016G 2 Fax: (02) 2268-6238 HON HAI PRECISION IND. CO., LTD. 2 TZU YU STREET, TU-CHENG CITY TAIPEI HSIEN, TAIWAN 236, R.O.C. Tel: (02) 2268-3466

: NVR3086B8683 RECEIPT DATE :2006/8/29 TEST DATE : 2006/8/29 PART DESCRIPTION

: ACER BEAGLE ANTENNA PART NUMBER

: N/A SAMPLE ID. TEST ITEM

: Sample1

: 1.VSWR 2. Antenna Gain TEST METHOD

: N/A PRE-CONDITION OPERATOR

: N/A

: 9904 TEST CONDITION

: VSWR Test @2~3GHz, number of points=201, IF bandwidth=300Hz AMBIENT CONDITION

: Temperature: 23.5 C Relative Humidity: 53.5%

TEST EQUIPMENT

Last Cal.: [

Due: [

: 988-0003 2005/9/9 2006/9/8 Result:

SET UP 2 90o 270o 180o 0o PAGE 3 OF 11 FT3A10016G 2 Fax: (02) 2268-6238 HON HAI PRECISION IND. CO., LTD. 2 TZU YU STREET, TU-CHENG CITY TAIPEI HSIEN, TAIWAN 236, R.O.C. Tel: (02) 2268-3466

: NVR3086B8683 RECEIPT DATE :2006/8/29 TEST DATE : 2006/8/29 PART DESCRIPTION

: ACER BEAGLE ANTENNA PART NUMBER

: N/A SAMPLE ID. TEST ITEM

: Sample1

: 1.VSWR 2. Antenna Gain TEST METHOD

: N/A PRE-CONDITION OPERATOR

: N/A

: 9904 TEST CONDITION

: VSWR Test @2~3GHz, number of points=201, IF bandwidth=300Hz AMBIENT CONDITION

: Temperature: 23.5 C Relative Humidity: 53.5%

TEST EQUIPMENT

Last Cal.: [

Due: [

: 988-0003 2005/9/9 2006/9/8 Result:

SET UP 3 90o 270o 180o 0o PAGE 4 OF 11 FT3A10016G 2 Fax: (02) 2268-6238 HON HAI PRECISION IND. CO., LTD. 2 TZU YU STREET, TU-CHENG CITY TAIPEI HSIEN, TAIWAN 236, R.O.C. Tel: (02) 2268-3466

: NVR3086B8683 RECEIPT DATE :2006/8/29 TEST DATE : 2006/8/29 PART DESCRIPTION

: ACER BEAGLE ANTENNA PART NUMBER

: N/A SAMPLE ID. TEST ITEM

: Sample1

: 1.VSWR 2. Antenna Gain TEST METHOD

: N/A PRE-CONDITION OPERATOR

: N/A

: 9904 TEST CONDITION

: VSWR Test @2~3GHz, number of points=201, IF bandwidth=300Hz AMBIENT CONDITION

: Temperature: 23.5 C Relative Humidity: 53.5%

TEST EQUIPMENT

Last Cal.: [

Due: [

: 988-0003 2005/9/9 2006/9/8 1. VSWR@2~3GHz, number of points=201, IF bandwidth=300Hz SWR SET UP 1 SET UP 2 SET UP 3 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 2.5 2.4 Freqency(GHz) 2.6 VSWR 2.4GHz 2.45GHz 2.5GHz Set up 1 Set up 2 Set up 3 1.20 1.08 1.15 1.29 1.17 1.07 1.51 1.39 1.30 Result:

2.5 1.5 3 2 1 PAGE 5 OF 11 FT3A10016G 2 Fax: (02) 2268-6238 HON HAI PRECISION IND. CO., LTD. 2 TZU YU STREET, TU-CHENG CITY TAIPEI HSIEN, TAIWAN 236, R.O.C. Tel: (02) 2268-3466

: NVR3086B8683 RECEIPT DATE :2006/8/29 TEST DATE : 2006/8/29 TEST CONDITION

: VSWR Test @2~3GHz, number of points=201, IF bandwidth=300Hz AMBIENT CONDITION

: Temperature: 23.5 C Relative Humidity: 53.5%

TEST EQUIPMENT

Last Cal.: [

Due: [

: 988-0003 2005/9/9 2006/9/8 PART DESCRIPTION

: ACER BEAGLE ANTENNA PART NUMBER

: N/A SAMPLE ID. TEST ITEM

: Sample1

: 1.VSWR 2. Antenna Gain TEST METHOD

: N/A PRE-CONDITION OPERATOR

: N/A

: 9904 Result:

2. Antenna Pattern Set up 1 H(dBi) V(dBi) V+H(dBi) 2.4GHz

-11

-0.494 2.45GHz

-13.155

-0.926 2.5GHz

-14.517

-0.195

-0.124

-0.674

-0.037 Set up 1 Horizontal Polarization PAGE 6 OF 11 FT3A10016G 2 Fax: (02) 2268-6238 HON HAI PRECISION IND. CO., LTD. 2 TZU YU STREET, TU-CHENG CITY TAIPEI HSIEN, TAIWAN 236, R.O.C. Tel: (02) 2268-3466

: NVR3086B8683 RECEIPT DATE :2006/8/29 TEST DATE : 2006/8/29 PART DESCRIPTION

: ACER BEAGLE ANTENNA PART NUMBER

: N/A SAMPLE ID. TEST ITEM

: Sample1

: 1.VSWR 2. Antenna Gain TEST METHOD

: N/A PRE-CONDITION OPERATOR

: N/A

: 9904 TEST CONDITION

: VSWR Test @2~3GHz, number of points=201, IF bandwidth=300Hz AMBIENT CONDITION

: Temperature: 23.5 C Relative Humidity: 53.5%

TEST EQUIPMENT

Last Cal.: [

Due: [

: 988-0003 2005/9/9 2006/9/8 Result:

Set up 1 Vertical Polarization PAGE 7 OF 11 FT3A10016G 2 Fax: (02) 2268-6238 HON HAI PRECISION IND. CO., LTD. 2 TZU YU STREET, TU-CHENG CITY TAIPEI HSIEN, TAIWAN 236, R.O.C. Tel: (02) 2268-3466

: NVR3086B8683 RECEIPT DATE :2006/8/29 TEST DATE : 2006/8/29 PART DESCRIPTION

: ACER BEAGLE ANTENNA PART NUMBER

: N/A SAMPLE ID. TEST ITEM

: Sample1

: 1.VSWR 2. Antenna Gain TEST METHOD

: N/A PRE-CONDITION OPERATOR

: N/A

: 9904 TEST CONDITION

: VSWR Test @2~3GHz, number of points=201, IF bandwidth=300Hz AMBIENT CONDITION

: Temperature: 23.5 C Relative Humidity: 53.5%

TEST EQUIPMENT

Last Cal.: [

Due: [

: 988-0003 2005/9/9 2006/9/8 Result:

Set up 2 H(dBi) V(dBi) V+H(dBi) 2.4GHz

-4.441

-11.796

-3.708 2.45GHz

-4.305

-11.893

-3.607 2.5GHz

-3.974

-12.753

-3.434 Set up 2 Horizontal Polarization PAGE 8 OF 11 FT3A10016G 2 Fax: (02) 2268-6238 HON HAI PRECISION IND. CO., LTD. 2 TZU YU STREET, TU-CHENG CITY TAIPEI HSIEN, TAIWAN 236, R.O.C. Tel: (02) 2268-3466

: NVR3086B8683 RECEIPT DATE :2006/8/29 TEST DATE : 2006/8/29 PART DESCRIPTION

: ACER BEAGLE ANTENNA PART NUMBER

: N/A SAMPLE ID. TEST ITEM

: Sample1

: 1.VSWR 2. Antenna Gain TEST METHOD

: N/A PRE-CONDITION OPERATOR

: N/A

: 9904 TEST CONDITION

: VSWR Test @2~3GHz, number of points=201, IF bandwidth=300Hz AMBIENT CONDITION

: Temperature: 23.5 C Relative Humidity: 53.5%

TEST EQUIPMENT

Last Cal.: [

Due: [

: 988-0003 2005/9/9 2006/9/8 Result:

Set up 2 Vertical Polarization PAGE 9 OF 11 FT3A10016G 2 Fax: (02) 2268-6238 HON HAI PRECISION IND. CO., LTD. 2 TZU YU STREET, TU-CHENG CITY TAIPEI HSIEN, TAIWAN 236, R.O.C. Tel: (02) 2268-3466

: NVR3086B8683 RECEIPT DATE :2006/8/29 TEST DATE : 2006/8/29 PART DESCRIPTION

: ACER BEAGLE ANTENNA PART NUMBER

: N/A SAMPLE ID. TEST ITEM

: Sample1

: 1.VSWR 2. Antenna Gain TEST METHOD

: N/A PRE-CONDITION OPERATOR

: N/A

: 9904 TEST CONDITION

: VSWR Test @2~3GHz, number of points=201, IF bandwidth=300Hz AMBIENT CONDITION

: Temperature: 23.5 C Relative Humidity: 53.5%

TEST EQUIPMENT

Last Cal.: [

Due: [

: 988-0003 2005/9/9 2006/9/8 Result:

Set up 3 H(dBi) V(dBi) V+H(dBi) 2.4GHz

-10.453

-0.258 2.45GHz

-11.924

-0.188 2.5GHz

-12.672 0.25 0.139 0.094 0.466 Set up 3 Horizontal Polarization PAGE 10 OF 11 FT3A10016G 2 Fax: (02) 2268-6238 HON HAI PRECISION IND. CO., LTD. 2 TZU YU STREET, TU-CHENG CITY TAIPEI HSIEN, TAIWAN 236, R.O.C. Tel: (02) 2268-3466

: NVR3086B8683 RECEIPT DATE :2006/8/29 TEST DATE : 2006/8/29 PART DESCRIPTION

: ACER BEAGLE ANTENNA PART NUMBER

: N/A SAMPLE ID. TEST ITEM

: Sample1

: 1.VSWR 2. Antenna Gain TEST METHOD

: N/A PRE-CONDITION OPERATOR

: N/A

: 9904 TEST CONDITION

: VSWR Test @2~3GHz, number of points=201, IF bandwidth=300Hz AMBIENT CONDITION

: Temperature: 23.5 C Relative Humidity: 53.5%

TEST EQUIPMENT

Last Cal.: [

Due: [

: 988-0003 2005/9/9 2006/9/8 Result:

Set up 3 Vertical Polarization PAGE 11 OF 11 FT3A10016G

Date: June 6, 2007 Compliance Certification Services Certification Division 561F Monterey Road Morgan Hill, CA 95037 To whom it may concern:

We, the undersigned, hereby authorize the Testing Division of Compliance Engineering Services, Inc., d.b.a. Compliance Certification Services and hereafter referred to as CCS, to act on our behalf solely with regards to the Certification (as defined below);

provided, however, CCS will not provide for any payments beyond published Corporate Contract between CCS and Broadcom without our prior written consent. Certification means only the following actions: Test and issue reports for our products upon request; sign FCC, IC and CAB application forms relating to our products on our behalf; pay certification fees on our behalf; submit FCC, IC and ETSI test reports and product documents for product approval; and answer questions from certification review on our behalf. We, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 853(a). In authorizing CCS Testing Division as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:

a)

(individual Regulatory Authority requirements pertaining to Equipment Authorization);

b) provision for examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;

c) certification has been granted;

d) Division into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;

e) matter that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;

upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which comply with the the relevant provisions of the certification program use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a f) with specified standards;

g) misleading manner;

h) ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division, which are governed by individual Regulatory Authority requirements;

i) keep a record of all complaints made known to us relating to the products compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;

j) found in products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;

k) This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely Yours, take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies document the actions taken. Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Date: August 2, 2007 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020, originally granted on 7/22/2005. The major changes filed under this application are:

Change #1 If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Add additional antenna:

Foxconn dipole antenna, Peak gain: 3.57dBi Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

Siberia LCD Antenna Distance to User Buttons and BT Module

(Display opened to 110 degrees) Left WWAN/WLAN Antenna Right WWAN/UWB Antenna MIMO Antenna WLAN Aux. Antenna Power / Volume Buttons Bluetooth Module Siberia LCD Antenna Distance to User Buttons and BT Module (Display opened to 110 degrees) WWAN/WLAN WWAN/UWB Main (L) Aux (R) Aux. WLAN WLAN MIMO BT Module 475 mm 458 mm 245 mm 245 mm Power / Volume Buttons 334 mm 334 mm 60 mm 60 mm

BCM94321MC, BCM94311MCG, BCM94311MCAG FCC Portable update (Dell Siberia) May 2007 No. Antenna Antenna type Antenna model Peak Gain 2.4GHz/dBi Peak Gain 5GHz/dBi BRCM Internal referece Advanced-Connectek Stamped metal sheet AMP8P-700022 Stamped metal sheet WT0581-11-001-R WT0581-11-002-R WT0581-11-003-R Manufacturer Amphenol 5 6 7 8 Foxconn Hitachi Stamped metal sheet WDAN-DWDS1-001-DF HMGT02-DL12 Main 2.67 (V) Aux 2.17 (H) Aux 2.532 (V) Main 3.25 (H) Dell Siberia option 1 Dell Siberia option 1 Dell Siberia option 1 MIMO 0.5 (H) Aux 1.9 (V) MIMO 1.8 (H) Main 5.26 (V) Dell Siberia option 1

Date: 2007/05/16 GENERAL DECLARATION We, Broadcom Corp., declare that the model BCM94311MCG, FCC ID: QDS-

BRCm1020 cannot be set to any non-US frequency and that the device does not support Ad-Hoc* on any non-US frequency. Therefore, Ad-Hoc can only be used on ch. 1-11. If you have any questions, please dont hesitate to contact us. Thank you!

Signature: > gw fy we Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corp.

FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 Description of Permissive Change This report is prepared for FCC class II permissive change. The difference compared with the original design is as the following:

u PA has been changed. u Add two antennas as below. No. 1 2 Antenna Type Gain (dBi) Connector PIFA PIFA 3(Main) 3(Aux) UFL UFL Report No. RF960510H03

BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94806 Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 April 23, 2007 Federal Communication Commission Equipment Authorization Division, Application Processing Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 RE: FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 Best Regards, Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Daniel Lawless Broadcom Corporation April 23, 2007 With this letter Broadcom Corporation permits HON HAI Precision IND.CO.,LTD., to use the data contained in the test report filed with the FCC for Broadcoms model BCM94311MCG, FCCID: QDS-BRCM1020, for HON HAI Precision IND.CO.,LTDs C2PC filing to certify 2nd source Skywork PA.

FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 Operational Description This device is a Broadcom 802.11g Wireless LAN PCI-E Mini Card, the maximum data rate could be up to 54Mbps which OFDM technique will be applied. If the signal to noise radio is too poor which could not support 54Mbps, the 11Mbps data rate with CCK technique will be applied. The transmitter of EUT (Broadcom 802.11g Wireless LAN PCI-E Mini Card) is powered from host equipment. The antennas type used in this product are as below. No. Antenna Type Gain (dBi) Connector 1 2 PIFA PIFA 3(Main) 3(Aux) UFL UFL The other instruction, please have a look at the users manual. Report No. RF960510H03

RF Antenna Cable Assembly Specification 1. Electrical Properties :

1.1 Frequency Range 1.2 Impedance 2.4GHz ~ 2.5GHz 50 Nominal 1.3 VSWR 1.92 Max. 1.4 Return Loss

-10 dB Maximum 1.5 Electrical Wave 1/2Dipole 1.6 Gain(peak).1.8dBi 1.7 Admitted Power 1W 2. Physical Properties :

2.1 CableRG-178 Coaxial Cable 2.2 Antenna CoverTPE 2.3 Antenna Base PC 2.4 Antenna Base PBT 2.5 Operating Temp. -20 ~ +65 2.6 Storage Temp. -30 ~ +75 2.7 Color .White (DuPont Spectramaster LS033) 2.8 Connector...SMA Plug Reverse (Plated Ni) 1 2

Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information

(English Language Required for Intel Regulatory Review / Approval) Platform Platform Platform Platform Platform Owner Brand Name Model Name ODM Target Launch Date Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Brand Name Part Number Module Module ModuleModule With WWAN Module

(Check Box) Hewlett-Packard International Pte. Ltd. Hewlett-Packard International Pte. Ltd. Tecate Inventec Corporation

(2007/ 02/ 26) Wistron NeWeb Corp. Wistron NeWeb Corp. Wistron NeWeb Corp. Wistron NeWeb Corp. Main Antenna: 6036B0010901 6036B0010901 6036B0010901 6036B0010901 AUX Antenna: 6036B0011001 6036B0011001 6036B0011001 6036B0011001 MC5720 MC8775 MC8765 Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 1/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Antenna Sample / Antenna Data Requirements for worldwide regulatory approval n o i t c e S Description of Required OEM / ODM Antenna Information 1A Part Number for Antenna only 1B Antenna Manufacturer Name 1C Description of Antenna Type US / IC EU Japan Taiwan S.Korea Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required N/A N/A N/A N/A 1D Part number of Antenna Assembly / cable impedance, length & diameter. Required Desired Desired Desired Desired 1E Main antenna (Peak Gain W/ cable loss) *

Required Required Required Required Required 1E OR 1F, 1G, 1H 1F Main and AUX antenna (Peak Gain only) *

Required Required Required Required Required 1G VSWR of cable including connector Required Required Required Required Required 1H Main antenna (Cable loss W/ connector) *

Required Required Required Required Required Dimensioned Photographs and Drawings of Main and AUX antennas Radiation patterns of antennas loaded in the host platform. Platform model name / number - correlated to antenna manufacturer and antenna part number Photograph(s) or Drawings showing location of antennas in platform. (S. Korea requires photographs of antennas for approval submission). Taiwan requires pictures of each antenna type shown in the system. Mech. drawings / photos with dimensions of antenna locations and distance from end-user (For evaluation of SAR testing requirement). Photograph(s) or Drawings showing the location of all antennas (WWAN, other) and distance between those transmitting antennas. Information will be used to evaluate whether co-location testing is required. Required Required Required Required Required Required Desired Required N/A Required Required Required Desired Required Desired Required Required Desired Required

(Photos) Required

(Photos) Required N/A N/A N/A N/A Required N/A N/A N/A N/A Local representative contact information for LMA/

PARS process. Required N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 2/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Antenna Information Section 1. Antenna Assembly Specifications Antenna Assembly Summary:

Antenna Peak Gain Table:

Main antenna Frequency (MHz) 824.2 836.6 848.8 1850.2 1880 1909. Horizontal

(dBi)

-4.76

-3.96

-3.64

-1.25

-0.98 1.44 Vertical

(dBi)

-2.77

-3.18

-2.94

-3.99

-5.41

-3.62

 Antenna Peak Gain required being test in system basis.

 1E frame contend absolutely peak antenna gain include H/V Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 3/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Section 2. Dimensioned Photos or Drawings of Antennas Include a dimensioned photo and dimensioned drawing of Main antenna here. Main Antenna Dimensioned Drawing:

Main Antenna Photo:

Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 4/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Include a dimensioned photo and dimensioned drawing of AUX antenna here. AUX Antenna Dimensioned Drawing:

AUX Antenna Photo:

Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 5/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Section 3. Radiation characteristics of antennae Loaded in Host Platform 850MHz radiation characteristic Main antenna: 824.2 MHz Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 6/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Main antenna: 836.6 MHz Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 7/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Main antenna: 848.8 MHz Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 8/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 1850 MHz radiation characteristic Main antenna: 1850.2 MHz Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 9/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Main antenna: 1880 MHz Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 10/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Main antenna: 1909.8 MHz Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 11/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Section 4. Host Platform Information OEM / ODM Host platform: (XXXXXXX) platform correlated to antenna data Rating Label Photo:

Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 12/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Section 5. Antenna Host Platform Location Information Include a dimensioned photo or dimensioned drawing of Main and AUX antenna placements. (Not applicable for receive-only antenna Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 13/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Section 6. Antenna dimensional information for SAR evaluation Include a dimensioned photo or dimensioned drawing showing the distance (mm) between the transmit antennas and the user (excluding hands, wrist, feet, lap/ thigh, and ankle) Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 14/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Section 7. Diagram Example of Co-Location Antenna Separation Include a dimensioned photo or dimensioned drawing showing the distance (mm) between all WWAN transmit antennas and other co-located radiator transmit antenna such as Bluetooth, WWAN,..

(Note: Due to the evolving rules regarding co-location, each platform will need to be reviewed on a case by case basis) Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 15/16 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.4 Section 8. Local representative contact information Local representative contact information is required for regulatory support for target countries below. Local company name Contact name Phone number FAX Number e-Mail Address Notes Argentina Brazil Indonesia Israel Malaysia Mexico Singapore South Africa USA, Canada Telecommunication Equipment Dealer License Required Regulatory WWAN Antenna Information 16/16

Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information

(English Language Required for Intel Regulatory Review / Approval)

(OEM/ODM or antenna vendor is required to complete this document with platform antenna information. Remove Intel references and make this your own document) DT15 EET-I Wistron NeWeb Corp. Main Antenna: 6036B0010701 Aux Antenna: 6036B0010801 MIMO Antenna: 6036B0010601 WM3B2100 WM3B2200BG WM3B2915ABG WM3 945ABG Brand Name Model Name Antenna Vendor Antenna Part Number With WLAN Module

(Check Box) Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 1/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Antenna Sample / Antenna Data Requirements for worldwide regulatory approval Description of Required OEM / ODM Antenna Information n o i t c e S 1A Part Number for Antenna only 1B Antenna Manufacturer Name 1C Description of Antenna Type Part number of Antenna Assembly / cable impedance, length & diameter. 1D 1E Main & Aux antenna (Peak Gain W/ cable loss) 1E OR 1F, 1G, 1H 1F Main & Aux antenna (Peak Gain only) 1G VSWR of cable including connector 1H Main & Aux antenna (Cable loss W/ connector) Dimensioned Photographs and Drawings of main &

auxiliary antennas Radiation patterns of antennas loaded in the host platform. Platform model name / number - correlated to antenna manufacturer and antenna part number Photograph(s) or Drawings showing location of antennas in platform. (S. Korea requires photographs of antennas for approval submission). Taiwan requires pictures of each antenna type shown in the system. Mech. drawings / photos with dimensions of antenna locations and distance from end-user (For evaluation of SAR testing requirement). Photograph(s) or Drawings showing the location of all antennas (WLAN, BT, other) and distance between those transmitting antennas. Information will be used to evaluate whether co-location testing is required. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EU US / IC Japan Taiwan Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required N/A N/A N/A Required Desired Required Required Required Required Desired Desired S.Korea Required Required N/A Desired Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Desired Required N/A Required Required Required Desired Required Desired Required Required Desired Required

(Photos) Required

(Photos) Required N/A N/A N/A N/A Required N/A N/A N/A N/A Local representative contact information for LMA/

PARS process. Required N/A N/A N/A N/A Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 2/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Antenna Information Section 1. Antenna Assembly Specifications Antenna Assembly Summary:

Antenna Peak Gain Table:

Main antenna Aux Antenna MIMO Antenna Horizontal

(dBi)

-0.72

-0.14

-0.53 0.25

-0.04

-0.03

-0.17 1.25

-0.90 Vertical

(dBi)

-2.00

-2.99

-2.69

-0.44

-0.63

-1.58

-0.47 0.13 0.28 Hori+Ver

(dBi) 0.04 0.84 0.21 1.06 0.49 1.33 1.83 1.56 1.02 Horizontal

(dBi)

-1.32 0.43

-0.61

-0.85

-0.58

-0.58

-0.83

-0.77

-1.10 Vertical

(dBi)

-0.18 0.33 0.30

-1.47

-0.68

-0.86

-0.59

-0.31 0.01 Hori+Ver

(dBi) 0.73 1.81 1.16 0.46 1.25 1.76 2.02 1.21 1.59 Horizontal

(dBi) 0.00

-0.75

-0.99

-2.54

-1.78

-0.67

-2.68

-3.19

-3.71 Vertical

(dBi)

-1.87

-3.75

-2.20

-0.52 0.08 0.25 0.76 0.48 0.62 Hori+Ver

(dBi) 0.68 0.15

-0.09 1.30 1.29 1.51 1.61 1.10 1.54 Frequency

(MHz) 2400 2450 2500 5150 5250 5350 5470 5647.5 5825 Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 3/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Section 2. Dimensioned Photos or Drawings of Antennas Include a dimensioned photo and dimensioned drawing of main antenna here. Main Antenna Dimensioned Drawing:

Main antenna Aux antenna Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 4/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 MIMO antenna Main antenna Aux antenna Main and Aux Antenna Photo:

MIMO antenna Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 5/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Section 3. Radiation characteristics of antennae Loaded in Host Platform 2400-2500MHz radiation characteristic Main antenna: 2400 MHz Main antenna: 2450 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 6/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Main antenna: 2500 MHz Auxiliary antenna: 2400 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 7/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Auxiliary antenna: 2450 MHz Auxiliary antenna: 2500 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 8/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 MIMO antenna: 2400 MHz MIMO antenna: 2450 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 9/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 MIMO antenna: 2500 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 10/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 5150-5350 MHz radiation characteristic Main antenna: 5150 MHz Main antenna: 5250 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 11/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Main antenna: 5350 MHz Auxiliary antenna: 5150 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 12/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Auxiliary antenna: 5250 MHz Auxiliary antenna: 5350 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 13/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 MIMO antenna: 5150 MHz MIMO antenna: 5250 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 14/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 MIMO antenna: 5350 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 15/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 5470-5725MHz radiation characteristic Main antenna: 5470 MHz Main antenna: 5647.5 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 16/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Main antenna: 5825 MHz Auxiliary antenna: 5470 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 17/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Auxiliary antenna: 5647.5 MHz Auxiliary antenna: 5825 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 18/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 MIMO antenna: 5470 MHz MIMO antenna: 5647.5 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 19/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 MIMO antenna: 5825 MHz Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 20/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Section 4. Host Platform Information OEM / ODM Host platform: (XXXXXXX) platform correlated to antenna data Rating Label Photo:

Module Location Photo: (if Singapore required) Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 21/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Section 5. Antenna Host Platform Location Information Include a dimensioned photo or dimensioned drawing of main and auxiliary antenna placements. Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 22/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Section 6. Antenna dimensional information for SAR evaluation Include a dimensioned photo or dimensioned drawing showing the distance (mm) between the transmit (main) antenna and the user (excluding hands, wrist, feet, and ankle) Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 23/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Section 7. Diagram Example of Co-Location Antenna Separation Include a dimensioned photo or dimensioned drawing showing the distance (mm) between WLAN antenna and 2nd radiator transmit antenna.

(Note: Due to the evolving rules regarding co-location, each platform will need to be reviewed on a case by case basis) Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 24/25 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 6.0 Section 8. Local representative contact information Local representative contact information is required for regulatory support for target countries below. Local company name Contact name Phone number FAX Number e-Mail Address Notes Argentina Brazil Indonesia Israel Malaysia Mexico Singapore South Africa USA, Canada Telecommunication Equipment Dealer License Required Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 25/25

Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Date: December 13, 2006 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020, originally granted on 11/30/2005. The major changes filed under this application are:

Change #1 Bandedge and radiated/conducted emissions were tested to verify compliance. SAR testing is performed with the mentioned platform to demonstrate RF compliance. Co-location with Bluetooth module (FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1018) is also evaluated to ensure RF compliance. The Foxconn antenna WDAN-HQTT8001-DF (main)/ WDAN-HQTT8003-DF (Aux) used for HP HSTNN-Q22C, is the same type as WNC, 81.ED415.002, which is already certified in previous filing for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020, and has a lower gain. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Adding portable platform, HP HSTNN-Q22C. Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Date: November 6, 2006 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 Dear Examiner, This letter confirms that the device with FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 operates on Ch 1-11 in the US. Operation is and will be limited to band 2412 - 2462 MHz. Ch 12 and 13 are not used on this card in the US. This application reduces the frequency range of operation previously granted of 2412 - 2472 MHz

(channels 1 through 13) by dropping channels 12 and 13, giving an operating frequency range of 2412 - 2462 MHz. The product has never been shipped with the capability to operate on channels 12 and 13 in the US, therefore there is no risk of the proposed device being operated on channels 12 and 13 through the use of an older version of software driver in the US. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Daniel Lawless Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Date: November 2, 2006 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 Dear Examiner, Pursuant to Section 2.1043 of the FCC rules, we hereby request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020, originally granted on 7/22/2005. The major changes filed under this application are:

Change #1 Changed to B1 silicon, which is dropped in replacement parts and there are no associated circuitry changes. Change #2 Remove the shield from the bottom of the board. RF circuitry is on the top side of the board and covered under the top shield. The device continues to have a complete shield, with the bottom shield formed by the ground plane of the circuit board that connects to the top shield. The device continues to meet the FCC RF shielding requirement on modular approval. Output power stays the same as approved. Radiated emissions and band edge measurements were taken to ensure continued compliance. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Daniel Lawless Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Date: November 6, 2006 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 Dear Examiner, This letter confirms that the device with FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 operates on Ch 1-11 in the US. Operation is and will be limited to band 2412 - 2462 MHz. Ch 12 and 13 are not used on this card in the US. This application reduces the frequency range of operation previously granted of 2412 - 2472 MHz

(channels 1 through 13) by dropping channels 12 and 13, giving an operating frequency range of 2412 - 2462 MHz. The product has never been shipped with the capability to operate on channels 12 and 13 in the US, therefore there is no risk of the proposed device being operated on channels 12 and 13 through the use of an older version of software driver in the US. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Daniel Lawless Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

November 06, 2006 Broadcom FCC Reference: FCC ID QDS-BRCM1020 , Elliott Reference J65136 Table on page 27 of 58 showing power levels for band edge measurements is missing the power level for the channel 10 g-mode measurements. The level is stated in the table on page 34, please confirm these levels were the correct levels. Response: Page 27 power for channel 10 G-mode. Yes the power levels tables in page 34 are the levels we tested to. The notes in the test report state that the powers measured during testing were the gated average power, and the 414mW on the existing grant is for peak power. Please explain how the 19dBm (80mW) maximum power measured during testing relates to the 414mW used in the filing and in the MPE calculation. Response: The various measurement methods for peak power can give significantly different measurements. The previous applications listed both peak and gated average power measurements. As the gated power measurement provides for a more consistent measurement, the gated measurements (Average measurements made during periods of transmission) were used to establish the output power on each channel at the same level as used for the original filing and subsequent C2PC applications. The application form and MPE use the peak power measurements originally reported in the last C2PC. FYI - It is noted that the power level was set to 19dBm for all measurements of harmonics emissions while the measurements of band-edge emissions at 2390 MHz and 2483.5 MHz were made at the "shipping" power levels. Response: That is correct. The attestation regarding the change in frequency range needs to explain why there is no risk of the new version being operated on the old frequency band ... Response: A revised attestation letter has been uploaded.

BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94806 Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: July 14, 2005 Compliance Certification Services Certification Division 561F Monterey Road Morgan Hill, CA 95037 To whom it may concern:

We, the undersigned, hereby authorize the Testing Division of Compliance Engineering Services, Inc., d.b.a. Compliance Certification Services and hereafter referred to as CCS, to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by CCS on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. In authorizing CCS Testing Division as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:

a) comply with the relevant provisions of the certification program;

b) c) d) e) f) make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including provision for examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;

make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which certification has been granted;

do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification Division into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;

upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising matter that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;

use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity with specified standards;

g) h) i) j) endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a misleading manner;

ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division;

keep a record of all complaints made known to the us relating to the products compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;

take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies found in products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;

k) document the actions taken. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely Yours, Daniel Lawless Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, California 94086 Phone: 408-543-3000 FAX: 408-543-3399

Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Date: November 21, 2005 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020, originally granted on 7/22/2005. The major changes filed under this application are:

Change #1 If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Add additional antenna:

Hitachi Stamped Metal Sheets antenna, Peak gain: 3.9dBi Daniel Lawless Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

Date: June 15, 2005 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Re: Request for Confidentiality In reference to the application under FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020, and pursuant to Sections 0.457(d)(1)(ii) and 0.459 of the Commission's Rules, the Applicant hereby requests confidential treatment of the accompanying information as outlined below:

Schematics Part List Block diagram Theory of Operation The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the Applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The Applicant understands that pursuant to Rule 0.457(d)(1)(ii), disclosure of this Application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Sincerely yours, Daniel Lawless Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

Broadcom Corporation Request for transmitter modular approval FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020 Transmitter Module Characteristics Item 1 Have its own RF shielding Requirements EUT Device is equipped with Metal shielding to cover RF section. Refer to internal photos All inputs to the modules are buffered through logic or microprocessor inputs. Internal 1.2V and 3.3V power regulators. Refer to Block diagram PIFA antenna with I-PEX connector. Device was connected to a host via an extender board in a standalone configuration Two proposed FCC ID label format will be included in the filing. One of label is to be placed on the module and the other label is to be placed on the outside of system. Refer to FCC ID label format and location file. Refer to Users Guide Exhibit MPE calculation is provided to demonstrate RF compliance for mobile modular approval. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Have buffered modulation/data inputs (if such inputs are provided), Have it own power supply regulation Meet the antenna requirements of Section 15.203 Be tested in a stand-alone configuration, i.e., the antenna, AC or DC power and data input/output lines must be connected to the module but, the module must not be inside another case during testing Be labeled with its own FCC ID number, and if the FCC ID is not visible when the module is installed inside another device, then the outside of the device into which the module is installed must also display a label referring to the enclosed module. The modular transmitter is manufactured so that the user cannot influence the operation of the transmitter that will operate outside of the scope of the regulations. Address compliance with the Commission's RF exposure limits in Sections 1.1310 and 2.1093. In addition, spread spectrum transmitters operating under Section 15.247 are required to address RF exposure compliance in accordance with Section 15.247(b)(4).

Helen Zhao Subject:

FW: Broadcom Corporation, FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020, Assessment NO.: AN05T4959, Notice#1 From:

Sent:

To:

Cc:

Subject:

Danielle Zhan Friday, July 22, 2005 3:55 PM Helen Zhao Barbara Judge; Michael Heckrotte; Mike Kuo; Christine Vu RE: Broadcom Corporation, FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1020, Assessment NO.: AN05T4959, Notice#1 Question #1: Based upon "Worst Case Power and Bit Rate Setting" table on page 7 of the test report, PSD was measured with different Power setting at channels 1, 2, 6, 10, 11, 13. However section 7.1.6 only reports the test results at channel 1, 6, 13, without specifying the gate average power setting. If all the PSD measurement was done with same setting: 19dBm, please update the table on page 7. Otherwise, please revise section 7.1.6 to provide additional test data at channels 2, 10, 11 and indicate Power Setting as well.

[Danielle] Additional test data have been added into the Rev. B report as attached. 05U3484-1B FCC Report.pdf Best Regards, Danielle Question #2: Page 77 of the test report lists "Power = 19dBm" at channel 13, which does not agree with "Worst Case Power and Bit Rate Setting" table on page 7. Please confirm which is correct and revise the test report accordingly.

[Danielle] Corrected. See revised test report. The items indicated above must be submitted before processing can continue on the above referenced application. Failure to provide the requested information within 30 days of the original e-mail date may result in application dismissal and forfeiture of the filing fee. Also, please note that partial responses increase processing time and should not be submitted. Any questions about the content of this correspondence should be directed to the e-mail address listed below the name of the sender. 1